You are on page 1of 344

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN Before driving your vehicle please read this Own- As with other vehicles with features for
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel
confidence. It was produced using the latest with controls and maintenance requirements, as- drive models correctly may result in loss of
techniques and strict quality control. sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. control or an accident. Be sure to read
“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-
This manual was prepared to help you under- ing and driving” section of this manual.
stand the operation and maintenance of your WARNING
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE- ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this MINDERS FOR SAFETY! This vehicle will handle and maneuver
manual before operating your vehicle.
Follow these important driving rules to differently from an ordinary passenger
A separate Warranty Information Booklet help ensure a safe and comfortable trip car because it has a higher center of
explains details about the warranties cov- for you and your passengers! gravity for off-road use. As with other
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service vehicles with features of this type, fail-
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
and Maintenance Guide” explains details ure to operate this vehicle correctly may
cohol or drugs.
about maintaining and servicing your ve- result in loss of control or an accident.
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will and never drive too fast for conditions. Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-
explain how to resolve any concerns you road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-
● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro- ing collision and rollover”, and “Driving
may have with your vehicle, as well as
priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen safety precautions”, in the “Starting and
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
children should be seated in the rear driving” section of this manual.
law.
seat.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle ● ALWAYS provide information about the
best. When you require any service or have any MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
proper use of vehicle safety features to
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the all occupants of the vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified.
extensive resources available to them. Modification could affect its performance,
● ALWAYS review this owner’s manual for safety or durability, and may even violate
important safety information. governmental regulations. In addition,
For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive damage or performance problems result-
ing from modifications may not be cov-
models, a mark is placed at the begin-
ning of the applicable sections/items. ered under NISSAN warranties.

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65


available on this model. Therefore, you may find WARNING
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
WARNING
All information, specifications and illustrations in
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
this manual are those in effect at the time of
and certain vehicle components contain
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
or emit chemicals known to the State of
specifications or design without notice and with-
California to cause cancer and birth de-
out obligation.
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
THIS MANUAL and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
You will see various symbols in this manual. They State of California to cause cancer and
are used in the following ways: APD1005 birth defects or other reproductive harm.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
WARNING
or “Do not let this happen.”
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
risk, the procedures must be followed tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
precisely. vehicle. © 2005 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
GARDENA, CALIFORNIA
CAUTION
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
This is used to indicate the presence of a Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
hazard that could cause minor or moder- indicate movement or action. system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
ate personal injury or damage to your ve- means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro- recording or otherwise, without the prior written
cedures must be followed carefully. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gar-
call attention to an item in the illustration. dena, California.

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WELCOME TO THE WORLD OF NISSAN
NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and com-
puters in automobiles, and has led the industry in
improving both performance and fuel efficiency
through new engine designs and the use of syn-
thetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The com-
pany has also developed ways to build quality into its
vehicles at each stage of the production process,
both through extensive use of automation and —
most importantly — through an awareness that
people are the central element in quality control.
From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers
until you took delivery of your new NISSAN, dozens
of checks were made to ensure that only the best job
was being done in producing and delivering your
vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that
when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for
WFW0002 maintenance, the service technician will perform his
work according to the quality standards that have
Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to styling design at NISSAN Design America, Inc. in been established by NISSAN.
produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical San Diego, California, and engineering at NISSAN
transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a suc- Technical Center North America in Farmington Hills, Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As you
cessful worldwide company that manufactures cars Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs more than know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety
and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them 21,000 people throughout the United States, systems that will help protect you and your passen-
in 170 nations. Canada, and Mexico. An additional 60,000 people gers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
work for the 1,250 NISSAN and INFINITI dealers We urge you to use the seat belts every time you
NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured drive the vehicle.
by NISSAN Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in across North America.
Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world- NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the The NISSAN story of growth and achievement re-
wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest flects our major goal: to provide you, our customer,
automaker in the world. In addition to cars and Canadian economy. NISSAN Canada Inc., its sup- with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsman-
trucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marine pliers and over 150 dealers employ approximately ship — a product that we can be proud to build and
engines, boats and other diversified products. 4,500 people. These include company employees you can be proud to own.
and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada.
NISSAN has made a substantial and growing in- In addition, many Canadians work for companies
vestment in North America. NISSAN’s commitment that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with ma-
is over $6 billion dollars in capital investments in terials and services ranging from the operation of
facilities across the continent. Some of the facilities port facilities and transportation services, to the
include the NISSAN Manufacturing facilities in Can- supply of lubricants, parts and accessories.
ton, Mississippi and in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to the following information:
For U.S. customers
provide NISSAN directly with comments or – Your name, address, and telephone number Nissan North America, Inc.
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the Consumer Affairs Department
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s P.O. Box 191
number:
side) Gardena, California 90248-0191
For U.S. customers
– Date of purchase For Canadian customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
Nissan Canada Inc.
(1-800-647-7261) – Current odometer reading 5290 Orbitor Drive
For Canadian customers – Your NISSAN dealer’s name Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
1-800-387-0122
– Your comments or questions
OR

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10
Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS

1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-12)


2. Supplemental curtain side-impact and
rollover air bags (if so equipped)
(P. 1-43)
3. Front seat belts (P. 1-12)
4. Supplemental front impact air bags
(P.1-43)
5. Seats (P. 1-2)
6. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P.1-50)
7. Seat belt pre-tensioners (P. 1-56)
8. Supplemental side-impact air bag
(if so equipped) (P. 1-43)
9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-32)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

WII0047

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Engine hood (P. 3-8)


2. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-23)
3. Windshield (P. 8-18)
4. Power windows (P. 2-45)
5. Door locks, keyfob, keys
(P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-14)
7. Tire pressure (P. 9-11)
8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
9. Tire chains (P. 8-36)
10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
11. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-25)
12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-29)
13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-13)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

WII0048

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
EXTERIOR REAR

1. Roof rack (P. 2-44)


2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)
3. Glass hatch (P. 3-8)
4. Rear window washer (P.2-24)
5. Glass hatch release (P.3-8)
6. Back door release (P. 3-9)
7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
8. Fuel filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-10, P. 9-3)
9. Fuel filler door (P. 3-10)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

WII0049

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. DVD entertainment system


(if so equipped) (P. 4-47)
2. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-47)
3. Map lights (P. 2-50)
4. Sun visors (P. 3-13)
5. HomeLinkT universal transceiver
(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
6. Glove box (P. 2-37)
7. Front seats (P. 1-2)
8. 2nd row seats (P.1-10)
9. 3rd row seats (P. 1-12)
10. Luggage storage (P. 2-41)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

WII0050

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Ventilators (P. 4-12)


2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-25)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) (P. 4-46)
4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-43, P. 2-30)
5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)
6. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-14)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-23, P. 2-24)
8. Storage (P. 2-34)
9. Audio system controls (P. 4-25)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-43)
11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-37)
12. Power outlet (P. 2-33)
13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-30)
14. Hill descent control switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-32)
15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-10)
16. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
WIC0877 switch (P. 2-31)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-17)
18. Climate controls (P. 4-13, 4-21)
19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-52)
20. Hazard lights (P. 2-29)
21. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
22. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-12)
23. Pedal position adjustment switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-12)
24. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-15)
25. Navigation system and controls*
(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir


(P. 8-12)
2. Battery (P. 8-13)
3. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
7. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)
8. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)
10. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

WDI0479

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Warning Name Page


light light light
Charge warning 2-14 Low windshield 2-16
Anti-lock brake 2-13
light washer fluid
or warning light
warning light
Door open 2-14
warning light Seat belt warn- 2-16
Automatic 2-13 ing light and
Engine oil pres- 2-14
transmission oil chime
sure warning
temperature light Supplemental 2-16
warning light air bag warning
( 4WD warning 2-15
light
model) light (
model)
Automatic 2-13
transmission Low fuel warn- 2-15
park warning ing light
light (
Low tire pres- 2-15
model)
sure warning
Brake warning 2-13 light
or light

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Indicator Name Page Indicator Name Page Indicator Name Page
light light light
Automatic 2-17 High beam in- 2-17 Transfer 4LO 2-19
transmission dicator light position indica-
position indica- (Blue) tor light
tor light (
Hill Descent 2-32
model)
Cruise main 2-17 Control (HDC)
switch indicator indicator light Turn 2-20
light (if so equipped) signal/hazard
indicator lights
Cruise set 2-17 Malfunction 2-18
switch indicator indicator lamp Vehicle dy- 2-20
light (MIL) namic control
off indicator
4WD shift indi- 2-17 Overdrive off 2-19 light
cator light indicator light
(
Security indica- 2-19
model)
tor light
Front passenger 2-17
Slip indicator 2-19
air bag status
light
light

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Child restraint installation on 3rd row bench


Front manual seat adjustment seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Front power seat adjustment CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Child restraint installation on front passenger
Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Active head restraint (front seats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Booster seat installation on 2nd row bench
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 seat positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Booster seat installation on 3rd row bench
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 seat positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Booster seat installation on front passenger
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Child restraint installation on 2nd row bench
seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
04/27/05—debbie X
SEATS

FRONT MANUAL SEAT


ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation. The seat may move
suddenly and could cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.

ARS1152

WARNING ● For the most effective protection when


the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when be upright. Always sit well back in the
the seatback is reclined. This can be seat and adjust the seat properly. See
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not “Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” later
be against your body. In an accident, in this section.
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to
make sure it is securely locked.

WRS0175 WRS0176
Forward and backward Reclining
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
seat forward or backward to the desired position. back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
Release the lever to lock the seat in position. up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WRS0131 WRS0163
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s FRONT POWER SEAT Operating tips
seat) ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped) ● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of overload protection circuit. If the motor
the seat cushion to the desired position. WARNING stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while then reactivate the switch.
driving so full attention may be given to
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a
vehicle operation. The seat may move
long period of time when the engine is off.
suddenly and could cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle. This will discharge the battery.

● Do not leave children unattended inside See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended matic drive positioner operation.
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Forward and backward
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the de-
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat WRS0164 WRS0389
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve- Push the front or rear end of the switch up or The lumbar support feature provides lower back
hicle is stopped. down to adjust the angle and height of the seat support to the driver. Move the lever up or down
cushion. to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
WRS0468 the vehicle is in motion, the seat should WRS0469
Outboard seats be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat and adjust the seat belt properly. Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row
2ND ROW BENCH SEAT See “Precautions on seat belt usage” The outboard seating positions on the 2nd row
ADJUSTMENT later in this section. bench seat can be tipped forward for easy entry
or exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the
Reclining 3rd row s 1 lift up on the latch located on the
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever and upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row
lean back. bench seat and fold the seatback forward at an
angle over the seat base. This will release the
The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.
back for occupants of different sizes for added
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit
(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this
section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped.
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LRS0331 WRS0470 WRS0134
Then s 2 lift up on the lower corner of the seat HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
base and tip the outboard seating position of the with the center of your ears.
2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd row To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,
bench seat lift up on the same latch and fold the push and hold the lock knob and push the head
seatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift up restraint down.
on the seat base and tip it forward. The head restraints on the 2nd and 3rd row seats
are removable.

WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted prop-
erly as they may provide significant pro-
tection against injury in an accident. Do
not remove them. Check the adjustment
after someone else uses the seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Do not attach anything to the head re-
straint stalks. Doing so could impair
active head restraint function.
The head restraint moves forward utilizing the
force that the seatback receives from the occu-
pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the
head restraint helps support the occupant’s head
by reducing its backward movement and helping
absorb some of the forces that may lead to whip-
lash type injuries.
Active head restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
SPA1025 LRS0514
Active head restraints operate only in certain
ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head ARMREST
seats) restraints return to their original positions. To use the center armrest on the 2nd row bench
Properly adjust the active head restraints as de- seat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat and
WARNING fold it down to the resting position.
scribed earlier in this section.
● Always adjust the head restraints prop-
erly as specified in the previous section.
Failure to do so can reduce the effec-
tiveness of the active head restraint.
● Active head restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Al-
ways wear seat belts. No system can
prevent all injuries in any accident.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Do not fold down the rear seats when Folding the front passenger’s seatback
occupants are in the rear seat area or (if so equipped)
any luggage is on the rear seats.
To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for
● Head restraints should be adjusted extra storage length when transporting long
properly as they may provide significant items:
protection against injury in an accident.
Always replace and adjust them prop- s
1 Slide the seat to the rear-most position. Lift
erly if they have been removed for any up on the recline lever, located on the out-
reason. side edge of the seat, and fold the seatback
forward as far as it will go. Then lift up on the
● If the head restraints are removed for latch located on the upper corner of the
any reason, they should be securely seatback to release the back of the seat.
stored to prevent them from causing
injury to passengers or damage to the
LRS0608 vehicle in case of sudden braking or an
FLEXIBLE SEATING accident.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
WARNING upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
tion. If they are not completely secured,
area or on the rear seats when they are
passengers may be injured in an acci-
in the fold-down position. In a collision,
dent or sudden stop.
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be ● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
seriously injured or killed. vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
cargo could cause personal injury.
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING
● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-
back flat forward to carry longer ob-
jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-
cured and not near an air bag. In a
crash, an inflating air bag might force
that object toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even death. Se-
cure objects away from the area in
which an air bag would inflate. See
“Precautions on supplemental restraint
system” later in this section.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
LRS0609 area or on the front passenger’s seat WRS0472

s
2 Once the seatback is released it will enable when it is in the fold-down position. Use Folding the 2nd row bench seat
you to fold the front passenger seatback flat of these areas by passengers could re-
over the seat cushion. sult in serious injury in an accident or To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum
sudden stop. cargo hauling:
3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a
seating position lift up on the seatback and s
1 Lower the head restraints to the full “down”
position. Pull the strap forward, located in
push it up to an upright position. Then pull up the center of each seat cushion, and fold
on the recline lever and lean the seatback to each seat cushion toward the front of the
a proper seating position. Release the lever vehicle.
to lock the seatback in position.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LRS0494 LRS0495 WRS0471
s
2 Then lift up on the recline lever on the side of s
3 There is a carpet panel flap on the back of s
4 The carpet panel flap provides a level cargo
the outboard seats to fold the outboard seat- each seat that can be folded toward the floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded
backs flat. To fold the center seatback flat, back of the vehicle flat.
pull up on the strap on the edge of the center
5. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seats
seat cushion and fold the seatback toward
to a seating position reverse the process for
the front of the vehicle.
the outboard seats.
6. To return the center seat to a seating posi-
tion, lift up on the pull strap on the back of
the seat base while lifting on the seatback.
Then push the seat cushion back into place.
Make sure to properly raise the seat-
back to an upright position and push
the seat cushion down into place.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
SEAT BELTS

WRS0473 SSS0136

Folding the 3rd row seats PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT


To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo
USAGE
capacity: If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
1. Make sure that the head restraints are low- justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
ered. your seat, your chances of being injured or killed
in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be
2. Stow the third row seat belts in the retainer greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages
clips on the side of the cargo area. you and all of your passengers to buckle up every
time you drive, even if your seating position in-
3. Then pull up on the latch located in the
cludes a supplemental air bag.
upper corner of each seatback and fold the
seatback forward over the seat base. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
unfold the seatback and push it back until it
latches into position.
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this ● The seat belt should be properly ad-
vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire
strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the
priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely ● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
fastened to the proper buckle. tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
effectiveness.
use during a collision be replaced un-
● Do not allow more than one person to less the collision was minor and the
use the same seat belt. belts show no damage and continue to
● Never carry more people in the vehicle operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
than there are seat belts. not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
● If the seat belt warning light glows con- damage or improper operation is noted.
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat ● All child restraints and attaching hard-
SSS0014 belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- ware should be inspected after any col-
function in the system. Have the system lision. Always follow the restraint
WARNING checked by a NISSAN dealer. manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
● Always route the shoulder belt over ● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has The child restraints should be replaced
your shoulder and across your chest. activated, it cannot be reused and must if they are damaged.
Never run the belt behind your back, be replaced together with the retractor.
under your arm or across your neck. The See your NISSAN dealer. CHILD SAFETY
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder. ● Removal and installation of the pre- Children need adults to help protect them.
tensioner seat belt system components They need to be properly restrained.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE In addition to the general information in this
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could manual, child safety information is available from
increase the risk of internal injuries in many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
an accident. government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
There are three basic types of child restraint for infants and small children. See “Child Re- placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer to
systems: straints” later in this section. the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommendations.
● Rear facing child restraint Also, there are other types of child restraints
NISSAN recommends that small children be
available for larger children for additional protec-
● Front facing child restraint placed in child restraints that comply with Federal
tion.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-
● Booster seat
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens tor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. and children be restrained in the rear seat. a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less According to accident statistics, children follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear are safer when properly restrained in the lation and use.
facing child restraints. Front facing child re- rear seat than in the front seat.
straints are available for children who outgrow Larger children
This is especially important because your
rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- Children who are too large for child restraints
old. Booster seats are used to help position a tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
longer use a front facing child restraint. later in this section. properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches
(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18
WARNING Infants kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed used to obtain proper seat belt fit.
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
them properly. The shoulder belt may mends that infants be placed in child restraints commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
come too close to the face or neck. The that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety der belt in the child’s seating position fits close to
lap belt may not fit over their small hip Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- Standards. You should choose a child restraint belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is
injury. Always use appropriate child facturer’s instructions for installation and use. properly positioned across the top, middle por-
restraints. tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the
Small Children
hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri- Children that are over one year old and weigh positions that have a three-point type seat belt.
tories require the use of approved child restraints between 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs (18 kgs) can be The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
have a label certifying that it complies with Fed- THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian WITH RETRACTOR
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child
has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or
WARNING
near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt
without the booster seat. ● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
WARNING times.
Never let a child stand or kneel on any ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo the seatback is reclined. This can be
areas while the vehicle is moving. The dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
child could be seriously injured or killed in be against your body. In an accident,
an accident or sudden stop. you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
PREGNANT WOMEN could also slide under the lap belt and WRS0174
receive serious internal injuries. Manual front seat shown
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, ● For the most effective protection when Fastening the seat belts
and always position the lap belt as low as pos- the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the be upright. Always sit well back in the
s
1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your
abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in
the emergency locking mode. See “Child re-
straints” later in this section for more information.
The automatic locking mode should be
used only for child restraint installation.
During normal seat belt use by a passen-
ger, the locking mode should not be acti-
vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-
fortable seat belt tension. It can also
change the operation of the front passen-
ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” later in this section.

WARNING
WRS0137 WRS0138
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
s
2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor s
3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug
that the seatbacks are completely se-
and insert the tongue into the buckle until on the hips as shown.
you hear and feel the latch engage. cured in the latched position. If they are
s
4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the not completely secured, passengers may
● The retractor is designed to lock during retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
pulling motion permits the seat belt to and across your chest.
move, and allows you some freedom of
movement in the seat. The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have a locking
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from mechanism for child restraint installation. It is
its fully retracted position, firmly pull referred to as the automatic locking mode or child
the belt and release it. Then smoothly restraint mode.
pull the belt out of the retractor.
When automatic locking mechanism is activated
the seat belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139 LRS0242

Unfastening the seat belts Front and 2nd row outboard seats
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
s
1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
and 2nd row outboard seats)
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts. The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-
Checking seat belt operation tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt To adjust, pull out s1 the adjustment button and
movement by two separate methods: move the shoulder belt anchor s 2 to the desired
position, so the belt passes over the center of the
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
shoulder. The belt should be away from your face
retractor.
and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly. lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder
To increase your confidence in the seat belts, belt anchor into position.
check the operation as follows.
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjust- ● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
ment button and try to move the shoul- by the same company which made the
der belt anchor up and down to make original equipment seat belts, should
sure it is securely fixed in position. be used with NISSAN seat belts.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should ● Adults and children who can use the
be adjusted to the position best for you. standard seat belt should not use an
Failure to do so may reduce the effec- extender. Such unnecessary use could
tiveness of the entire restraint system result in serious personal injury in the
and increase the chance or severity of event of an accident.
injury in an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
LRS0515 not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
Seat belt hook den stop.
When the seat belt is not in use and when folding SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on
the seat belt hooks. ● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
If, because of body size or driving position, it is Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
and fasten it, an extender is available which is seat belts to retract until they are completely
compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- dry.
tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of ● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
length and may be used for either the driver or guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
dealer for assistance if an extender is required. belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
CHILD RESTRAINTS

● Periodically check to see that the seat


belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.

ARS1098 WRS0256
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD WARNING
RESTRAINTS
● Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
WARNING for even the strongest adult to resist the
● Infants and small children should al- forces of a severe accident. The child
ways be placed in an appropriate child could be crushed between the adult and
restraint while riding in the vehicle. parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
Failure to use a child restraint can re- same seat belt around both your child
sult in serious injury or death. and yourself.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the ● Follow all of the child restraint manu-
Bag System, never install a rear-facing following points in mind: facturer’s instructions for installation
child restraint in the front seat. An in- ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying and use. When purchasing a child re-
flating supplemental front air bag could that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle straint, be sure to select one which will
seriously injure or kill your child. A rear- Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor fit your child and vehicle. It may not be
facing child restraint must only be used Vehicle Safety Standard 213. possible to properly install some types
in the rear seat. of child restraints in your vehicle.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
● NISSAN recommends that the child re- ● If the child restraint is not anchored
straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac- sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat properly, the risk of a child being in-
cording to accident statistics, children and seat belt system. jured in a collision or a sudden stop
are safer when properly restrained in ● If the child restraint is compatible with your greatly increases.
the rear seat than in the front seat. vehicle, place your child in the child restraint ● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-
● An improperly installed child restraint and check the various adjustments to be tioned to fit the child restraint, but as
could lead to serious injury or death in sure the child restraint is compatible with upright as possible.
an accident. your child. Choose a child restraint that is
● After attaching the child restraint, test it
designed for your child’s height and weight.
In general, child restraints are designed to be before you place the child in it. Push it
Always follow all recommended procedures. from side to side. Try to tug it forward
installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder
seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or and check to see if the belt holds the
a universal child restraint lower anchor system, territories require that infants and small restraint in place. The child restraint
children be restrained in an approved child should not move more than 1 inch (25
referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
restraint at all times while the vehicle is mm). If the restraint is not secure,
Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child re-
being operated. tighten the belt as necessary, or put the
straints include two rigid or webbing-mounted restraint in another seat and test it
attachments that can be connected to these again. You may need to try a different
lower anchors. For details, see the “LATCH WARNING
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- ● Improper use of a child restraint can in all types of vehicles.
tem” later in this section. increase the risk or severity of injury for
Child restraints for infants and small children of both the child and other occupants of
the vehicle.
various sizes are offered by several manufactur-

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● If you must install a front facing child ● Failure to use the retractor’s locking
restraint in the front seat, see “Child mode will result in the child restraint
restraint installation on front passenger not being properly secured. The re-
seat” later in this section. straint could tip over or otherwise be
unsecured and cause injury to the child
● When your child restraint is not in use,
in a sudden stop or collision.
keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in ● When installing a child restraint system
case of a sudden stop or accident. in the 2nd row center position both the
center seat belt connector tongue and
CAUTION buckle tongue must be secured. See
“Attaching the center seat belt” earlier
Remember that a child restraint left in a in this section.
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
WRS0478
before placing your child in the child
restraint. Front facing (center) — step 1

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION


ON 2ND ROW BENCH SEATS
WARNING
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used
when installing a child restraint.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Front facing
When you install a child restraint on the 2nd row
bench seat, follow these steps:
s
1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions. The back of the child restraint
should be secured against the vehicle seat
back. If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint
fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in
this section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the child restraint is
WRS0477 removed. If the seating position does not WRS0250
Front facing (outboard) — step 1 have an adjustable head restraint and it is Front Facing — step 2
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
s
2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
child restraint. hear and feel the latch engage.
Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LRS0458 LRS0457 WRS0252
Front Facing — step 3 Front Facing — step 4 Front Facing — step 5
s
3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is s
4 Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the s
5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. use force to push the child restraint from
retractor is in the automatic locking mode side to side, and tug it forward to make sure
(child restraint mode). It reverts back to that it is securely held in place. It should not
emergency locking mode when the seat belt move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does
is fully retracted. move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again
on the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure
the restraint move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again, or try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic
locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt
out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any
more belt webbing out of the retractor, the
retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the belt
is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

WRS0479 WRS0476
Rear facing (center) — step 1 Rear facing (outboard) — step 1
Rear facing
When you install a child restraint on the 2nd row
bench seat, follow these steps:
s
1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WRS0480 WRS0481 WRS0482
Rear Facing — step 2 Rear Facing — step 3 Rear Facing — step 4
s
2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child s
3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is s
4 Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you fully extended. At this time, the seat belt shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
hear and feel the latch engage. retractor is in the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-
Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- gency locking mode when the seat belt is
facturer’s instructions for belt routing. fully retracted.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic ● A child restraint with a top tether strap
locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt should not be used on the 3rd row
out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any bench seat.
more seat belt webbing out of the retractor,
the retractor is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the belt
is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
WRS0483 CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
Rear Facing — step 5 ON 3RD ROW BENCH SEAT
s
5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,
use force to push the child restraint from WARNING
side to side, and tug it forward to make sure
that it is securely held in place. It should not ● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking
move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does
mode retractor which must be used
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again
when installing a child restraint.
on the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure ● Failure to use the retractor’s locking
the restraint move the restraint to another mode will result in the child restraint
rear seating position and try again, or try a not being properly secured. The re-
different child restraint. Not all child re- straint could tip over or otherwise be
straints fit in all types of vehicles. unsecured and cause injury to the child
in a sudden stop or collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
When you install a child restraint on the 3rd row
bench seat, follow these steps:
s
1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Ad-
just the head restraint to its highest position.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. The back of the child restraint
should be secured against the vehicle seat
back. If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint
fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in
this section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the child restraint is
removed. If the seating position does not
WRS0484 WRS0250
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
Front facing interfering with the proper child restraint fit, Front Facing — step 2
try another seating position or a different s
2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child
WARNING child restraint. restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
mode retractor which must be used facturer’s instructions for belt routing.
when installing a child restraint.
● Failure to use the retractor’s locking
mode will result in the child restraint
not being properly secured. The re-
straint could tip over or otherwise be
unsecured and cause injury to the child
in a sudden stop or collision.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LRS0458 LRS0457 WRS0252
Front Facing — step 3 Front Facing — step 4 Front Facing — step 5
s
3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is s
4 Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the s
5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. use force to push the child restraint from
retractor is in the automatic locking mode side to side, and tug it forward to make sure
(child restraint mode). It reverts back to that it is securely held in place. It should not
emergency locking mode when the seat belt move more than 1 inch (25mm). If it does
is fully retracted. move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again
on the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure
the restraint move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again , or try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic
locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt
out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any
more belt webbing out of the retractor, the
retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the belt
is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

WRS0486 WRS0480
Rear Facing — step 1 Rear Facing — step 2
Rear facing s
2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
When you install a child restraint on the 3rd row hear and feel the latch engage.
bench seat, follow these steps:
Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
s
1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- facturer’s instructions for belt routing.
ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WRS0481 WRS0482 WRS0483
Rear Facing — step 3 Rear Facing — step 4 Rear Facing — step 5
s
3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is s
4 Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the s
5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. use force to push the child restraint from
retractor is in the automatic locking mode side to side, and tug it forward to make sure
(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer- that it is securely held in place. It should not
gency locking mode when the seat belt is move more than 1 inch (25mm). If it does
fully retracted. move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again
on the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure
the restraint move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again, or try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic
locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt
out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any
more seat belt webbing out of the retractor,
the retractor is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the belt
is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

WRS0416 WRS0467
LATCH system anchor point locations 2nd LATCH anchor point labels 2nd row bench
row bench seat seat
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers WARNING
for CHildren) SYSTEM
● Attach LATCH system compatible child
restraints only at the locations shown. If
a child restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident.
● The LATCH system anchors are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstance are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Some child restraints include two rigid or When you install a LATCH system compatible
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con- child restraint to the lower anchor attachments,
nected to two anchors located at certain seating follow these steps:
positions in your vehicle. This system is known as
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil- WARNING
dren) system. This system may also be referred to Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. your fingers into the lower anchor area
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle and feeling to make sure there are no
seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle obstructions over the LATCH system an-
is equipped with special anchor points that are chors, such as seat belt webbing or seat
used with LATCH system compatible child re- cushion material. The child restraint will
straints. Check your child restraint for a label not be secured properly if the LATCH sys-
stating that it is compatible with the LATCH sys- tem anchors are obstructed.
tem. This information may also be in the child
1. To install the LATCH system compatible
restraint owner’s manual. If you have such a child
child restraint, insert the child restraint
restraint, refer to the illustration for the seating LATCH system anchor attachments into the
positions equipped with LATCH system anchors anchor points on the seat. If the child re-
which can be used to secure the child restraint. straint is equipped with a top tether, see
The LATCH system anchors are located at the “Top tether strap child restraint” later in this
rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A section for installation instructions.
label is attached to the seatback to help you 2. After attaching the child restraint and before
locate the LATCH system anchors. placing the child in it, use force to push the
LATCH child restraints generally require the use child restraint from side to side and tug it
of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child forward to make sure that the child restraint
restraint” later in this section for installation in- is securely held in place. It should not move
structions. more than 1 inch (25 mm) .
When installing a child restraint, carefully read 3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
and follow the instructions in this manual and properly secured prior to each use.
those supplied with the child restraint.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD Anchor point locations
RESTRAINT Anchor points are located on the back of each
If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must seatback for all three seating positions of the 2nd
be secured to the anchor point provided behind row bench seat as shown.
its position. If you have any questions when installing a
top strap child restraint on the rear seat,
WARNING consult your NISSAN dealer for details.
Child restraint anchor points are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses.
WRS0485
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt
or the LATCH system (2nd row outboard seat 2nd row bench seat
positions only), as applicable. 1. Top tether strap
For the 2nd row bench seats, position the tether 2. Anchor point
over the top of the head restraint, with the head
restraint in the full “down” position. Secure the
tether strap to the tether anchor point located on
the back of the seatback of the same seat that the
child restraint is in.
The 3rd row bench seat is not equipped with top
tether anchor points.
For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint
installation instructions in this section and the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
● Failure to use the retractor’s locking
mode will result in the child restraint
not being properly secured. The re-
straint could tip over or otherwise be
unsecured and cause injury to the child
in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
senger air bag. See “Front passenger
air bag and status light” later in this
WRS0256 WRS0378 section.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION ● NISSAN recommends that child re-


ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT straints be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a forward
WARNING facing child restraint in the front pas-
senger seat, move the passenger seat
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air to the rearmost position. Also, be sure
Bag System, never install a rear-facing the front passenger air bag status light
child restraint in the front passenger is illuminated to indicate the passenger
seat. Supplemental front air bags in- air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air
flate with great force. A rear-facing bag and status light” later in this sec-
child restraint could be struck by the tion for details.
supplemental front air bag in a crash
and could seriously injure or kill your ● A child restraint with a top tether strap
child. should not be used in the front passen-
ger seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in
this section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the child restraint is
removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.

WRS0379 WRS0159
Front Facing — step 1 Front Facing — step 2
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, s
2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child
follow these steps: restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
s
1 Position the child restraint on the front pas-
senger seat. It should be placed in a Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
front-facing direction only. Move the facturer’s instructions for belt routing.
seat to the rearmost position. Adjust the
head restraint to its highest position. Always
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions. Child restraints for infants
must be used in the rear-facing direc-
tion and therefore must not be used in
the front seat.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seat back. If
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WRS0160 LRS0457 WRS0380
Front Facing — step 3 Front Facing — step 4 Front Facing — step 5
s
3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is s
4 Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull up s
5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in use force to push the child restraint from
retractor is in the automatic locking mode the belt. side to side, and tug it forward to make sure
(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer- that it is securely held in place. It should not
gency locking mode when the seat belt is move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does
fully retracted. move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again
on the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure
the restraint move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again , or try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
BOOSTER SEATS

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER ● A booster seat must only be installed in
locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt SEATS a seating position that has a
out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a
more belt webbing out of the retractor, the three-point type seat belt with a
retractor is in the automatic locking mode. WARNING
booster seat can result in a serious in-
● Infants and small children should al- jury in sudden stop or collision.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
ways be placed in an appropriate child
properly secured prior to each use. If the ● An improperly installed booster seat
restraint while riding in the vehicle.
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 could lead to serious injury or death in
Failure to use a child restraint or
through 6. an accident.
booster seat can result in serious injury
8. Turn the ignition to the ON position. The or death.
passenger air bag status light should say
● Infants and small children should never
“OFF” . If this light is not illuminated it
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
may indicate a malfunction. Move the child
for even the strongest adult to resist the
restraint to another seating position.
forces of a severe accident. The child
Have the system checked by a NISSAN
could be crushed between the adult and
dealer.
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
After the child restraint is removed and the seat same seat belt around both your child
belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode and yourself.
(child restraint mode) is canceled. ● NISSAN recommends that the booster
seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-
cording to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LRS0455 LRS0501 LRS0502
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by low back booster seat s 1 is chosen, the
WARNING
several manufacturers. When selecting any vehicle seat back must be at or above the
● Do not use towels, books, pillows or booster seat, keep the following points in mind: center of the child’s ears. If the seat back is
other items in place of a booster seat. lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
● Choose only a booster seat with a label
Items such as these may move during high back booster seat s 2 should be used.
normal driving or a collision and result certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
in serious injury or death. Booster seats Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian ● If the booster seat is compatible with your
are designed to be used with a Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de- and check the various adjustments to be
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
signed to properly route the lap and sure the booster seat is compatible with your
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
shoulder portions of the seat belt over child. Always follow all recommended pro-
and seat belt system.
the strongest portions of a child’s body cedures.
to provide the maximum protection dur- ● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
ing a collision. supported by the booster seat or vehicle All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
seat. The seat back must be at or above the territories require that infants and small
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
children be restrained in an approved child ● After placing the child in the booster
restraint at all times while the vehicle is seat and fastening the seat belt, make
being operated. sure the shoulder portion of the belt is
away from the child’s face and neck and
WARNING the lap portion of the belt does not
● Improper use of a booster seat can in- cross the abdomen.
crease the risk or severity of injury for ● Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
both the child and other occupants of child or under the child’s arm. If you
the vehicle. must install a booster seat in the front
● Follow all of the booster seat manufac- seat, see “Booster seat installation on
turer’s instructions for installation and front passenger seat” later in this
use. When purchasing a booster seat, section.
be sure to select one which will fit your ● When your booster seat is not in use,
child and vehicle. It may not be possible keep it secured with a seat belt to pre- LRS0502
to properly install some types of vent it from being thrown around in (Outboard position)
booster seats in your vehicle. case of a sudden stop or accident. BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
● If the booster seat and seat belt is not 2ND ROW BENCH SEAT
used properly, the risk of a child being CAUTION
injured in a collision or a sudden stop POSITIONS
Remember that a booster seat left in a
greatly increases. closed vehicle can become very hot. CAUTION
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- Check the seating surface and buckles
tioned to fit the booster seat, but as before placing your child in the booster Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automatic
upright as possible. seat. locking mode when using a booster seat
with the seat belts. When you install a
booster seat in the rear seat follow these
steps:

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
2. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-
sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to
obtain the correct booster seat fit. See
“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this
section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
3. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
LRS0504 LRS0507
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
(Center position) follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
1. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only structions for adjusting the belt routing. 3RD ROW BENCH SEAT
place it in a front facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt POSITIONS
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
structions. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned CAUTION
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automatic
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the locking mode when using a booster seat
belt routing. with the seat belts. When you install a
booster seat in the rear seat follow these
5. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- steps:
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in the “Three-point seat belt with 1. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
retractor” earlier in this section. place it in a front facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
2. The booster seat should be positioned on 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces- place it in a front facing direction. Always
sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
obtain the correct booster seat fit. See structions.
“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this
section. If the head restraint is removed, 3. The booster seat should be positioned on
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-
the head restraint when the booster seat is sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to
removed. If the seating position does not obtain the correct booster seat fit. See
have an adjustable head restraint and it is “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this
interfering with the proper booster seat fit, section. If the head restraint is removed,
try another seating position or a different store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
booster seat. the head restraint when the booster seat is
3. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low removed. If the seating position does not
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to LRS0454 have an adjustable head restraint and it is
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
structions for adjusting the belt routing. try another seating position or a different
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT booster seat.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack. WARNING 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
NISSAN recommends that child restraints
across the top, middle portion of the child’s follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
be installed in the rear seat. However, if
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat structions for adjusting the belt routing.
you must install a booster seat in the front
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
passenger seat, move the passenger’s 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
belt routing.
seat to the rearmost position. toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
5. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
tions for properly fastening a seat belt If you must install a booster seat in the front seat,
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shown in the “Three-point seat belt with follow these steps:
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
retractor” earlier in this section. 1. Move the seat to the rear-most position. manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
belt routing.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- PRECAUTIONS ON vehicle is impacted. In a rollover both curtain air
tions for properly fastening a seat belt SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated
shown in the “Three-point seat belt with for a short time.
retractor” earlier in this section. SYSTEM
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
7. When the ignition is turned to the ON posi- This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
tion, the passenger air bag status light may tion contains important information concerning vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute
or may not be illuminated, depending on the the driver and passenger supplemental front air for them. Seat belts should always be correctly
size of the child and the type of booster seat bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System), worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-
being used. See “NISSAN advanced air bag supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact tance away from the steering wheel, instrument
system” later in this section. and rollover air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts. panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier
in this section for instructions and precautions on
Supplemental front impact air bag system: seat belt usage.
The NISSAN advanced air bag system can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of The supplemental air bags operate only
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal when the ignition switch is in the ON or
collisions. START position.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system After turning the ignition key to the ON
(if so equipped): This system can help cushion position, the supplemental air bag warning
the impact force to the chest area of the driver light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
and front passenger in certain side impact colli- warning light will turn off after about 7
sions. The supplemental side air bag is designed seconds if the system is operational.
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
pacted.
Supplemental curtain side-impact and roll-
over air bag system (if so equipped): This
system can help cushion the impact force to the
head of occupants in front and rear outboard
seating positions in certain side impact or rollover
collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where the
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practi-
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
advanced air bag system monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
WRS0031 ● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
WARNING ● The seat belts and the supplemental
(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-
front air bags are most effective when
● The supplemental front air bags ordi- senger air bag OFF under some condi-
you are sitting well back and upright in
narily will not inflate in the event of a tions. This sensor is only used in this
the seat. The front air bags inflate with
side impact, rear impact, rollover, or seat. Failure to be properly seated and
great force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-
lower severity frontal collision. Also, wearing the seat belt can increase the
vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre-
the front passenger air bag will not in- risk or severity of injury in an accident.
strained, leaning forward, sitting side-
flate if the passenger air bag status See “Front Passenger air bag and sta-
ways or out of position in any way, you
light is lit. See “Front passenger air bag tus light” later in this section.
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
and status light” later in this section. crash. You may also receive serious or ● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
Always wear your seat belts to help fatal injuries from the supplemental ing wheel. Placing them inside the
reduce the risk or severity of injury in front air bag if you are up against it steering wheel rim could increase the
various kinds of accidents. risk that they are injured when the
supplemental front air bag inflates.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
ARS1133 ARS1041

WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the supplemental front air
bags, side air bags or curtain side-
impact and rollover air bags inflate if
they are not properly restrained. Pre-
teens and children should be properly
restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
ARS1045 WRS0256 WRS0431
Do not lean against the door.
WARNING
WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing Supplemental side air bag (if so equipped)
child restraint in the front seat. An in- and curtain side-impact and rollover air
flating supplemental front air bag could bag (if so equipped):
seriously injure or kill your child. See
● The supplemental side air bag and cur-
“Child restraints” earlier in this section
tain side-impact and rollover air bag
for details.
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower
severity side collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING
● The seat belts, the supplemental side
air bags and curtain side-impact and
rollover air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and up-
right in the seat. The side air bag and
curtain air bag inflate with great force.
Do not allow anyone to place their
hand, leg or face near the side air bag
on the side of the seatback of the front
seat or near the side roof rails. Do not
allow anyone sitting in the front seats or
rear outboard seats to extend their
WRS0365 SSS0162 hand out of the window or lean against
Do not lean against doors or windows. Do not lean against doors or windows. the door. Some examples of dangerous
riding positions are shown in the previ-
ous illustrations.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WRS0363 SSS0159

WARNING
● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do
not hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may
be seriously injured. Be especially care-
ful with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
supplemental side air bag inflation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
1. SRS curtain side-impact and rollover air
bag modules (if so equipped)
2. SRS curtain side-impact and rollover air
bag (if so equipped)
3. Diagnosis sensor unit
4. Supplemental front air bag modules
5. Crash zone sensor
6. Occupant classification system control
unit
7. Occupant classification sensor
8. Satellite sensors
9. Seat belt buckle switches
10. Pre-tensioner retractor
11. Supplemental side air bag modules (if
so equipped)
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-
vanced air bag system for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front air bag is located in
WRS0474 the center of the steering wheel. The passenger
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
supplemental front air bag is mounted in the light” later in this section for further details. One this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
dashboard above the glove box. The supplemen- front air bag inflating does not indicate improper increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higher performance of the system. close to, or is against, the front air bag module
severity frontal collisions, although they may in- during inflation.
If you have any questions about your air bag
flate if the forces in another type of collision are The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
dealer. If you are considering modification of your The supplemental front air bags operate
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact only when the ignition switch is in the ON
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the or START position.
indication of proper supplemental front air bag front of this Owner’s Manual.
system operation. After turning the ignition key to the ON
When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a position, the supplemental air bag warning
The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dual fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
stage inflators. It also monitors information from release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and warning light will turn off after about 7
the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit, does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to seconds if the system is operational.
seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classification not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-
sensor (weight sensor) and passenger seat belt ing. Those with a history of a breathing condition
tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on the should get fresh air promptly.
severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the
Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of
driver. For the front passenger, it additionally
seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on
monitors the weight of an occupant or object on
the face and chest of the front occupants. They
the seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa-
can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
tion from the sensors, only one front air bag may
However, an inflating front air bag may cause
inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity
facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
and whether the front occupants are belted or
do not provide restraint to the lower body.
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air
bag may be automatically turned OFF under Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
some conditions, depending on the weight de- should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
tected on the passenger seat and how the seat senger seated upright as far as practical away
belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
the passenger air bag status light will be illumi- supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order
nated. See “Front passenger air bag and status to help protect the front occupants. Because of
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Status light One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (weight sensor). It is in the bottom of the
The front passenger air bag status light is
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to
located under the climate controls. The light op-
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by
erates as follows:
weight. It works together with seat belt sensors
● Unoccupied passenger seat or when other described later. For example, if a child is in the
conditions are met as outlined in this sec- front passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-
tion: The illuminates to indicate that tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag
the front passenger air bag is OFF and will OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a
not inflate in a crash. child restraint of the type specified in the regula-
tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s
● Occupied passenger seat and the passen- weight can be detected and cause the air bag to
ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec- turn OFF. Weight sensor operation can vary de-
tion: The light is OFF to indicate that pending on the front passenger seat belt sen-
WRS0475 the front passenger air bag is operational. sors.
Front passenger air bag and status light Front passenger air bag The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-
signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
WARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
The front passenger air bag is designed to it is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint
under some conditions as described below in mode). Based on the weight on the seat detected
automatically turn OFF under some con-
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front by the weight sensor and the belt tension de-
ditions. Read this section carefully to
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a tected on the seat belt, the advanced air bag
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your system determines whether the front passenger
essary for most effective protection. Fail- vehicle are not part of this system. air bag should be automatically turned OFF as
ure to follow all instructions in this The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce required by the regulations.
manual concerning the use of seats, seat the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
belts and child restraints can increase the to certain front passenger seat occupants, such properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
risk or severity of injury in an accident. as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto- lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
to meet the requirements. small adults it may be turned OFF. Also, if the
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- heavy objects placed on the seat could result in in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting air bag inflation, because of the object’s weight Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out detected by the weight sensor. Other conditions
Other supplemental front air bag precau-
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a
tions
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant child is standing on the seat, or if two children are
improperly uses the seat belt in the automatic on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this
WARNING
locking mode (child restraint mode), this could manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle
cause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always be occupants are seated and restrained properly. ● Do not place any objects on the steer-
sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt ing wheel pad or on the instrument
properly for the most effective protection by the Using the passenger air bag status light, you can panel. Also, do not place any objects
seat belt and supplemental air bag. monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- between any occupant and the steering
tomatically turned OFF. The light will illuminate wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil- (indicating the air bag is OFF and will not inflate) jects may become dangerous projec-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat. when the front passenger seat is not occupied. tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child tal front air bag inflates.
restraints and booster seats be properly installed If an adult occupant is in the seat and the pas-
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the weight senger air bag status light is illuminated (indicat- ● Immediately after inflation, several
sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to ing that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the front air bag system components will be
operate as described above to turn the front person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
passenger air bag OFF for specified child re- or not using the seat belt properly. If a child verely burn yourself.
straints as required by the regulations. Failing to restraint must be used in the front seat, but the ● No unauthorized changes should be
properly secure child restraints and to use the status light is not lit (indicating that the air bag made to any components or wiring of
automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child the supplemental air bag system. This is
may allow the restraint to tip or move in an acci- restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. If to prevent accidental inflation of the
dent or sudden stop. This can also result in the such situations happen, properly position and supplemental air bag or damage to the
passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of restrain the occupant or child restraint. Other- supplemental air bag system.
being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this wise reposition the occupant or child restraint in
section for proper use and installation. a rear seat.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied and If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
the seat belt is not buckled, the passenger air bag bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, light , located in the meter and gauges area
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Do not make unauthorized changes to ● No unauthorized changes should be
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- made to any components or wiring of
pension system or front end structure. the seat belt system. This may affect the
This could affect proper operation of supplemental front air bag system.
the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal injury.
● Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious ● Work on and around the supplemental
personal injury. Tampering includes front air bag system should be done by
changes to the steering wheel and the a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-
instrument panel assembly by placing cal equipment should also be done by a
material over the steering wheel pad NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-
and above the instrument panel or by straint System (SRS) wiring should not
installing additional trim material be modified or disconnected. Unautho-
around the air bag system. rized electrical test equipment and WRS0381
probing devices should not be used on
● Modifying or tampering with the front Supplemental side-impact air bag (if
the air bag system.
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not ● A cracked windshield should be re- so equipped) and curtain side-impact
change the front seats by placing mate- placed immediately by a qualified re- and rollover air bags (if so equipped)
rial on the seat cushion or by installing pair facility. A cracked windshield could system
additional trim material, such as seat affect the function of the supplemental
covers, on the seat that are not specifi- air bag system. The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo-
cally designed to assure proper air bag cated in the outside of the seatback of the front
● The SRS wiring harness connectors are seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact and
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
yellow and orange for easy
objects under the front passenger seat rollover air bags are located in the side roof rails
identification.
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such in all 3 rows. These systems are designed to meet
objects may interfere with the proper When selling your vehicle, we request that you voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of
operation of the occupant classifica- inform the buyer about the supplemental front air injury to out-of-position occupants. However,
tion system (weight sensor). bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri- all of the information, cautions and warn-
ate sections in this Owner’s Manual. ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed. The supplemental side air bags and
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
curtain side-impact and rollover air bags are de- curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other
WARNING
signed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, injuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtain
although they may inflate if the forces in another side-impact and rollover air bags do not provide ● Do not place any objects near the seat-
type of collision are similar to those of a higher restraint to the lower body. back of the front seats. Also, do not
severity side impact. They are designed to inflate place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the etc.) between the front door finisher
on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They
driver and passenger seated upright as far as and the front seat. Such objects may
may not inflate in certain side collisions.
practical away from the supplemental side air become dangerous projectiles and
Curtain side-impact and rollover air bags are also bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as cause injury if the supplemental side air
designed to inflate in certain types of rollover far away as practical from the door finishers and bag inflates.
collisions or near rollovers. side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air ● Right after inflation, several side air bag
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an bag inflate quickly in order to help protect the and curtain side-impact and rollover air
indication of proper supplemental side air bag occupants. Because of this, the force of the side bag system components will be hot. Do
and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag op- air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase not touch them; you may severely burn
eration. the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or yourself.
is against, these air bag modules during inflation.
When the supplemental side air bag and curtain The side air bag will deflate quickly after the ● No unauthorized changes should be
air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, made to any components or wiring of
collision is over.
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not the side air bag and curtain air bag
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should The curtain side-impact and rollover air bag will system. This is to prevent accidental
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation remain inflated for a short time. inflation of the side air bag and curtain
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing air bag or damage to the side air bag
condition should get fresh air promptly. The supplemental side air bags and curtain and curtain air bag system.
side-impact and rollover air bags operate
Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of only when the ignition switch is in the ON ● Do not make unauthorized changes to
seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on or START positions. your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
the chest of the front occupants. Curtain side- pension system or side panel. This
impact and rollover air bags help to cushion the After turning the ignition key to the ON could affect proper operation of the
impact force to the head of occupants in the front position, the supplemental air bag warning supplemental curtain air bag system.
and rear outboard seating positions in all rows. light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
They can help save lives and reduce serious warning light will turn off after about 7
injuries. However, an inflating side air bag, or seconds if the system is operational.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Tampering with the supplemental side Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Front ● Work around and on the pre-tensioner
air bag system may result in serious seats) system should be done by a NISSAN
personal injury. For example, do not dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
change the front seats by placing mate- WARNING ment should also be done by a NISSAN
rial near the seatbacks or by installing dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
additional trim material, such as seat ● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be equipment and probing devices should
covers, around the side air bag. reused after activation. It must be re- not be used on the pre-tensioner seat
placed together with the retractor and belt system.
● Work around and on the curtain air bag buckle as a unit.
system should be done by a NISSAN ● If you need to dispose of the pre-
dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ● If the vehicle becomes involved in a tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a
ment should also be done by a NISSAN frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner
dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* not activated, be sure to have the pre- disposal procedures are set forth in the
should not be modified or discon- tensioner system checked and, if nec- appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.
nected. Unauthorized electrical test essary, replaced by your NISSAN Incorrect disposal procedures could
equipment and probing devices should dealer. cause personal injury.
not be used on the side air bag or cur- ● No unauthorized changes should be
tain air bag system. made to any components or wiring of The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system
the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This activates in conjunction with the front supple-
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are is to prevent accidental activation of mental air bag systems. Working with the seat
yellow or orange for easy identification. the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt when
When selling your vehicle, we request that you to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of
inform the buyer about the supplemental side air Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat collisions, helping to restrain front seat occu-
bag and curtain air bag system and guide the belt system may result in serious per- pants.
buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s sonal injury.
The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’s
Manual. retractor. These seat belts are used the same as
conventional seat belts.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,
smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
04/27/05—debbie X
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history WARNING LABELS
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly. Warning labels about the supplemental front air
bags and supplemental side-impact and rollover
After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated, air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as
load limiters allow the seat belt to release web- shown in the illustration.
bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the
chest.
If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner
system, the supplemental air bag warning
light will not come on, will flash intermit-
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or
START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner LRS0397
seat belt may not function properly. They must be 1. SRS Air bag warning labels
checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
nearest NISSAN dealer. The warning labels are located on the sur-
face of the sun visor.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt 2. SRS Side air bag warning label (if so
system and guide the buyer to the appropriate equipped)
sections in this Owner’s Manual.
The warning label is located on the side of
the passenger’s side center pillar.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
04/27/05—debbie X
When the ignition key is in the ON or START
WARNING
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns If the supplemental air bag warning light
off. This means the system is operational. is on, it could mean that the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side air bag,
If any of the following conditions occur, the curtain air bag systems and/or pre-
supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air tensioner seat belt systems will not oper-
bag, curtain air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt ate in an accident. To help avoid injury to
systems need servicing: yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
possible.
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light Repair and replacement procedure
flashes intermittently. The supplemental front air bags, supplemental
LRS0100 side air bags, curtain air bags and pre-tensioner
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG not come on at all. seat belts are designed to inflate on a one-time-
WARNING LIGHT only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged,
Under these conditions, the supplemental front the supplemental air bag warning light remains
The supplemental air bag warning light, air bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain air illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair
displaying in the instrument panel, moni- bag or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not and replacement of these supplemental air bag
tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag, operate properly. It must be checked and re- systems should be done only by a NISSAN
supplemental side-impact air bag and curtain paired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.
side-impact and rollover air bag and pre- dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
tensioner seat belt systems. The circuits moni-
hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple-
tored by the supplemental air bag warning light
mental side air bags, curtain air bags, pre-
are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, tensioner seat belts and related parts should be
satellite sensors, rollover sensor, front air bag pointed out to the person performing the mainte-
modules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag nance. The ignition key should always be in the
modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related LOCK position when working under the hood or
wiring. inside the vehicle.
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
04/27/05—debbie X
WARNING
● Once a supplemental front air bag,
supplemental side air bag or curtain air
bag has inflated, the air bag module will
not function again and must be re-
placed. Additionally, if any of the
supplemental front air bags inflate, the
activated pre-tensioner seat belts must
also be replaced. The air bag module
and pre-tensioner seat belt system
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and pre-tensioner
seat belt system cannot be repaired.
● The supplemental front air bag, side air
bag and curtain air bag systems, and
the pre-tensioner seat belt system
should be inspected by a NISSAN
dealer if there is any damage to the
front end or side portion of the vehicle.
● If you need to dispose of the supple-
mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt
system or scrap the vehicle, contact a
NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental
air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-
tem disposal procedures are set forth in
the appropriate NISSAN Service
Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
04/27/05—debbie X
2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-28
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Compass and outside temperature display Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-12 Hill descent control (HDC) switch (if so equipped) . . . 2-32
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Storage bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 2nd row under-seat storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) . . . . . . . . 2-22 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Seat pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Cargo area storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 HomeLinkT universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-51
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Programming HomeLinkT for Canadian
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Operating the HomeLinkT universal
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-53
Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Ventilators (P. 4-12)


2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/
turn signal switch (P. 2-25)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) (P. 4-46)
4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-43, P. 2-30)
5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)
6. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-14)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-23, P. 2-24)
8. Storage (P. 2-34)
9. Audio system controls (P. 4-25)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-43)
11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-37)
12. Power outlet (P. 2-33)
13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-30)
14. Hill descent control switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-32)
15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-10)
16. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
WIC0877 switch (P. 2-31)

2-2 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
METERS AND GAUGES

17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)


(P. 5-17)
18. Climate controls (P. 4-13, 4-21)
19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-52)
20. Hazard lights (P. 2-29)
21. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
22. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-12)
23. Pedal position adjustment switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-12)
24. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-15)
25. Navigation system and controls*
(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

LIC0736
1. Warning/indicator lights 6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/
2. Tachometer Trip computer (if so equipped)
3. Speedometer 7. Engine oil pressure gauge
4. Fuel gauge 8. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. Voltmeter

Instruments and controls 2-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.

LIC0737 LIC0780

1. Speedometer With twin trip odometer


2. Odometer/twin trip display Changing the display:
3. Change button For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer,
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER pushing the change button changes the display
as follows:
Speedometer Trip → Trip → Trip
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h).
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition key is in the ON position.

2-4 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Resetting the trip odometer: that was selected before the warning occurred.
The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the
Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-
vehicle is refueled.
ond resets the trip odometer to zero.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) display will change to (----).
The display of the trip computer is situated in the
speedometer display. When the ignition is turned NOTE:
to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the trip ● If the amount of fuel added while the
computer and then shows the mode chosen be- ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-
fore the ignition switch was turned OFF. play just before the ignition switch is
turned OFF may continue to be dis-
When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes played.
of the trip computer can be selected by pushing
LIC0781 the trip computer change button. The following ● When driving uphill or rounding curves,
modes can be selected: the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
With trip computer momentarily change the display.
For vehicles equipped with trip computer, push- Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)
ing the change button changes the display as Average speed (MPH or km/h)
follows: The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be The average speed mode shows the average
Trip → Trip → Distance to Empty → vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-
Average speed → Average fuel consumption → by pressing the change button for more than
ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the
Journey time → Trip approximately 1 second. The display is updated
fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a
For additional information, refer to “Trip com- The display is updated every 30 seconds. reset, the display shows (----).
puter” later in this section.
The dte mode includes a low range warning Average fuel consumption (Mpg or
For vehicles equipped with navigation system, feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is l/100km)
refer to “How to use the ’trip’ button” in the automatically selected and the digits blink in or-
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio der to draw the driver’s attention. Press the The average fuel consumption mode shows the
systems” section later in this manual. average fuel consumption since the last reset.
change button if you wish to return to the mode
Resetting is done by pressing the change button
Instruments and controls 2-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
04/27/05—debbie X
for more than approximately 1 second. The dis-
play is updated every 30 seconds. At about the
first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display
shows (----).
Journey time
The journey time mode shows the time since the
last reset. The displayed time can be reset by
pressing the change button for more than ap-
proximately 1 second.
Trip computer reset
Pushing the change button for more than 3 sec-
onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-
tance to empty (dte). LIC0738 LIC0739
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- GAUGE
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
the red zone s1 .
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range s 1 when the gauge needle points
CAUTION within the zone shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious outside air temperature and driving conditions.
engine damage.

2-6 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
The indicates that the fuel filler lid is
CAUTION
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal CAUTION
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor- ● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as the malfunction indicator lamp
safely possible. If the engine is over- (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
heated, continued operation of the ve- possible. After a few driving trips,
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In the lamp should turn off. If the
case of emergency” section for immediate lamp remains on after a few driving
action required. trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
LIC0740 ● For additional information, see “Mal-
FUEL GAUGE function indicator lamp (MIL)” later in
this section.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition key is turned to OFF.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).

Instruments and controls 2-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● If the gauge needle does not move with
the proper amount of engine oil, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer. Continued vehicle operation in
such a condition could cause serious
damage to the engine.

LIC0741 LIC0742

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE VOLTMETER


The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys- When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-
tem oil pressure while the engine is running. tion, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage.
When the engine speed is high, the engine oil When the engine is running, it indicates the gen-
pressure is also high. When it is low, the gauge erator voltage.
indicates the low oil pressure. While cranking the engine, the volts drop below
the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal
CAUTION range (11 – 15 volts) s 1 while the engine is
● This gauge is not designed to indicate running, it may indicate that the charging system
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to is not functioning properly. Have the system
check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in checked by a NISSAN dealer.
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.)

2-8 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
COMPASS AND OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if so
equipped)
This unit has the following functions:
● Measures terrestrial magnetism and indi-
cates heading direction of vehicle
● Indicates outside air temperature

LIC0583 WIC0810
Type A Type B
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY 140°F (60°C). When the temperature is above
194°F (90°C), the display will read “SC”.
Push the or TEMP button when the ignition
key is in the ON position. The outside tempera- ● When the outside temperature is between
ture will be displayed s
1 . -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F (-51°C), the dis-
play will read -40°F (-40°C). When the tem-
● To change from °F to °C, push and hold perature is below -60°F (-51°C), the display
the or TEMP button for about 3 sec- will read “OC”.
onds until the display begins to flash. Press
the button again to toggle between °F and ● The outside temperature sensor is located in
°C. Once you have selected °F or °C, the front of the radiator. The sensor may be
display will continue to flash for about 5 affected by road or engine heat, wind direc-
seconds, then the temperature will display. tion and other driving conditions. The display
may differ from the actual outside tempera-
● When the outside temperature is between 140°F ture or the temperature displayed on various
(60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the display will read signs or billboards.
Instruments and controls 2-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
COMPASS DISPLAY
Push the or COMP button when the igni-
tion key is in the ON position to display the
direction s
1 .

N: north
E: east
S: south
W: west
If the display reads “CAL”, calibrate the compass
by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.

WIC0355

2-10 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Zone variation change procedure 1. With the display turned on, push the
CAUTION
button about 8 seconds or the COMP but-
The difference between magnetic north and geo- ton for about 3 seconds until the zone selec- ● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
graphical north is known as variance. In some tion comes up (a number will be displayed in which are attached to the vehicle by
areas, this difference can sometimes be great the mirror compass window). means of a magnet. They affect the op-
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow eration of the compass.
these instructions to set the variance for your 2. Toggle until correct zone is found and re-
lease button. ● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
particular location if this happens: towel or similar material dampened
1. Press and hold the button for about 8 3. The display will return to the normal com- with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
seconds or the COMP button for about 3 pass mode within 5 seconds of no button cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
seconds. The current zone number will ap- activity. cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
pear in the display. mirror housing.
4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1
2. Find your current location on the zone map. through 3. See map.
Refer to the illustration. Record the zone ● If the compass deviates from the correct
number. indication soon after repeated adjustment,
3. Press and hold the or COMP button have the compass checked at an authorized
until the new zone number appears in the dealer.
display. After you stop pressing the switch ● The compass may not indicate the correct
in, the display will show a compass direction compass point in tunnels or while driving up
within a few seconds. or down a steep hill. (The compass returns
Inaccurate compass direction to the correct compass point when the ve-
hicle moves to an area where the geomag-
The compass display is equipped with automatic netism is stabilized.)
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.

Instruments and controls 2-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock brake warning light Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission oil temperature warn- Low windshield washer fluid warning light Hill descent control (HDC) indicator light (if so
ing light ( model) equipped)

Automatic transmission park warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
( model)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive off indicator light

Charge warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Security indicator light

Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light Transfer 4LO position indicator light
( model)

4WD warning light ( model) 4WD shift indicator light ( model) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light

CHECKING BULBS , or , , , , or , , , , , ,
,
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake The following lights come on briefly and then go
off: If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
and turn the ignition key to the ON position
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
without starting the engine. The following lights
electrical system. Have the system repaired
will come on: promptly.
2-12 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING LIGHTS Automatic transmission park
● All mode 4WD: The warning light may
or Anti-lock brake warning light ( model) come on when the ignition switch is ON
warning light and the automatic transmission lever is
WARNING shifted to the P position while shifting
If the light comes on while the engine is running, ● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that the transfer case between 4H and 4LO.
it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is not the automatic transmission P (Park) po- Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD,
functioning properly. Have the system checked sition will not function and the transfer AUTO, 4H, or 4LO position again to turn
by a NISSAN dealer. case is in neutral. off the ATP warning light when the
warning light comes on. (Before shift-
If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti- ● When parking, always make sure that ing the 4WD switch into the 4LO posi-
lock function ceases, but the regular braking the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates tion or out of 4LO in the 4H position,
system continues to operate. and the parking brake is set. Failure to move the automatic transmission se-
engage the transfer position in 2WD, lector lever into the N position.) Shift
If the light comes on while you are driving, AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in the
contact a NISSAN dealer for repair. the selector lever into the P position
vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting and make sure that the 4WD shift indi-
in serious personal injury or property
Automatic transmission oil damage.
cator light is ON and the ATP warning
temperature warning light light is OFF.)
● Part time 4WD: Shift the 4WD switch
( model) into the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position again
This light indicates that the automatic transmis-
sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-
This light comes on when the automatic transmis- to turn off the ATP warning light when
fer control is not secured in any drive position
sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comes the automatic transmission selector le-
while the automatic transmission selector lever is
on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as ver is in the P position and the ATP
in the P (Park) position, the transmission will
soon as safely possible until the light turns off. warning light is ON. (Before shifting the
disengage and the drive wheels will not lock.
4WD switch into the 4LO position, move
the automatic transmission selector le- or Brake warning light
CAUTION
ver into the N position once, shift the
Continued vehicle operation when the A/T selector lever into P again and make This light functions for both the parking brake and
oil temperature warning light is on may sure the ATP warning light is OFF.) the foot brake systems.
damage the automatic transmission.

Instruments and controls 2-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the Door open warning light
● If the brake fluid level is below the
light comes on when the parking brake is applied, MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
and also warns of a low brake fluid level. If the This light comes on when any of the doors are not
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
light comes on while the engine is running with brake system has been checked at a closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle NISSAN dealer. position.
and perform the following:
Charge warning light Engine oil pressure warning
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid light
as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this If this light comes on while the engine is running, This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
manual. it may indicate the charging system is not func- light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
brake system checked by a NISSAN dealer. missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN authorized repair shop.
dealer immediately.
WARNING The engine oil pressure warning light is not
CAUTION designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
● Your brake system may not be working dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
properly if the warning light is on. Driv- ● Do not ground electrical accessories the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it directly to the battery terminal. Doing this manual.
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest so will bypass the variable control sys-
service station for repairs. Otherwise, tem and the vehicle battery may not
have your vehicle towed because driv-
CAUTION
charge completely. Refer to “Variable
ing it could be dangerous. voltage control system” in the “Mainte- Running the engine with the engine oil
nance and do-it-yourself” section later pressure warning light on could cause se-
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
in this manual. rious damage to the engine almost imme-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
diately. Such damage is not covered by
level may increase your stopping dis- ● Do not continue driving if the generator warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
tance and braking will require greater belt is loose, broken or missing. is safe to do so.
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
4WD warning light lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-
– in the 4LO position for part time 4WD
( model) vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift inflated. You should stop and check your tires as
The 4WD warning light comes on when the key the transmission selector lever to the soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the N position with the brake pedal de- pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire infor-
engine is started. pressed and shift the 4WD shift mation placard. Driving on a significantly under-
switch to 2WD. inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly, lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
the warning light will either remain illuminated or ● If the warning light is still on after the
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
above operation, have your vehicle
blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
and driving” section. tire, including the spare, should be checked
possible.
monthly when cold and set to the recommended
CAUTION Low fuel warning light inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle plac-
● If the warning light comes on or blinks ard and owner’s manual.
during operation, have your vehicle This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel The recommended inflation pressure may also be
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- found on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
possible. nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel Low tire pressure warning:
● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the tank when the fuel gauge needle
in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD If the vehicle is being driven with very low tire
reaches E (Empty).
warning light turns on when you are pressure (lower than 28 psi, 193 kPa), the light
driving on dry hard surface roads: Low tire pressure warning will illuminate and the chime will sound for about
– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the light 10 seconds. If you select the tire pressure infor-
4WD shift switch to 2WD. mation in the display, the FLAT TIRE warning
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light message will be displayed.
– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
This light warns of low tire pressure. warning system” in the “Starting and driving”
the transmission selector lever to the
N position with the brake pedal de- NISSAN’s low tire pressure warning system is a section and “Low tire pressure warning system”
pressed and shift the 4WD shift tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire in the “In case of emergency” section.
switch to 2WD. pressure of all tires except the spare. When the
tire pressure monitoring system warning light is
Instruments and controls 2-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel Seat belt warning light and
● If the light does not come on with the
is replaced, tire pressure will not be chime
indicated and the low tire pressure
key switch turned ON, have the vehicle warning system will not function. Con- The light and chime remind you to fasten your
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
possible. possible for tire replacement and/or ignition key is turned to the ON or START position
● If the light comes on while driving, system resetting. and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, CAUTION for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt
pull off the road to a safe location and is securely fastened.
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. ● The low tire pressure warning system is
not a substitute for the regular tire pres- Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could sure check. Be sure to check the tire belts and supplemental restraint system” section
result in serious personal injury. Check pressure regularly. for precautions on seat belt usage.
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust ● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds Supplemental air bag warning
the tire pressure to the recommended of less than 20 MPH (32 km/h), the low
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire tire pressure warning system may not
light
and Loading Information label to turn operate correctly. When the ignition key is in the ON or START
the low tire pressure warning light OFF. position, the supplemental air bag warning light
If the light still comes on while driving ● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly. illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire off. This means the system is operational.
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as
Low windshield washer fluid If any of the following conditions occur, the
possible. warning light supplemental front air bags, supplemental side
This light comes on when the windshield washer air bags (if so equipped), curtain side-impact and
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid rollover air bags, and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-
as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the tems need servicing and your vehicle must be
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this taken to a NISSAN dealer:
manual. ● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
2-16 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● The supplemental air bag warning light INDICATOR LIGHTS 4WD shift indicator light
flashes intermittently. Automatic transmission ( model)
● The supplemental air bag warning light does position indicator light The light should turn off within 1 second after
not come on at all.
When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- turning the ignition switch to ON.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental tion, this indicator light shows the automatic
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre- While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-
transmission selector lever position. See “Driving cator light will illuminate the position selected by
tensioner seat belts may not function properly. the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section
For additional details see “Supplemental restraint the 4WD shift switch.
of this manual.
system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and The 4WD shift indicator light may blink
supplemental restraint system” section of this Cruise main switch indicator while shifting from one drive mode to the
manual.
light other.
WARNING The light comes on when the cruise control main Front passenger air bag
If the supplemental air bag warning light switch is pushed. The light goes out when the status light
is on, it could mean that the supplemental main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise The front passenger air bag status light ( )
front air bag, supplemental side air bag,
control system is operational. will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
curtain side-impact and rollover air bag
systems (if so equipped) and/or pre- OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
tensioner seat belt systems will not oper-
Cruise set switch indicator is being used.
ate in an accident. To help avoid injury to light For front passenger air bag status light operation,
yourself or others, have your vehicle The light comes on while the vehicle speed is see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as controlled by the cruise control system. If the light the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
possible. restraint system” section of this manual.
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
the cruise control system is not functioning prop-
High beam indicator light
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer. (Blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
Instruments and controls 2-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
The high beam indicator light also comes on The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You
when the passing signal is activated. steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if do not need to have your vehicle towed to
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the dealer.
Hill descent control (HDC) the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly,
system on indicator light ● Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — An
and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4
engine misfire has been detected which may
(if so equipped) liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
damage the emission control system. To re-
When the ignition switch is turned ON, this light After a few driving trips, the lamp should duce or avoid emission control system dam-
comes on briefly and then turns off. turn off if no other potential emission control age:
system malfunction exists.
The light comes on when the hill descent control – do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
system is activated. If this indicator lamp comes on steady for 20 (72 km/h).
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
If the HDC switch is on and the indicator light – avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
blinks, the system is not engaged. vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys- – avoid steep uphill grades.
If the indicator light does not come on or blink tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
when the hill descent switch is on, the system ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
being hauled or towed.
may not be functioning properly. Have the system “Technical and consumer information” section of
checked by a NISSAN dealer. this manual. The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinking
Operation and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
For additional information, see “Hill descent con- by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
trol (HDC) switch” later in this section and “Hill The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in your vehicle towed to the dealer.
descent control (HDC) system” in the “Starting one of two ways:
and driving” section of this manual. CAUTION
● Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — An
Malfunction indicator lamp emission control system malfunction has Continued vehicle operation without hav-
(MIL) been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If ing the emission control system checked
the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten and repaired as necessary could lead to
If this indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks or install the cap and continue to drive the poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
while the engine is running, it may indicate a vehicle. The lamp should turn off after and possible damage to the emission con-
potential emission control malfunction. a few driving trips. If the lamp does trol system.
not turn off after a few driving trips, have the
2-18 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Overdrive off indicator light not go off, have the traction control system The indicator light may blink while shifting
checked by a NISSAN dealer. from one drive mode to the other.
This light comes on when the overdrive function
is OFF. If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac- All mode 4WD
tion control system is disabled and the slip indi-
The automatic transmission overdrive function is If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position
cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds when
controlled by the overdrive switch. and the light blinks, stop the vehicle, drive slowly
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
forward and the light will turn on.
See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and To reset the system, you must perform the reset
driving” section of this manual. procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic control When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec- vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever
Security indicator light tion of this manual. to the N position with the brake pedal depressed,
then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to
If the light does not go off after performing the
This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in 4LO or 4H.
reset procedure, have the traction control system
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function checked by a NISSAN dealer. You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch
indicates the security system equipped on the between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle
vehicle is operational. Transfer 4LO position and shift the transmission selector lever to the N
For additional information, see “Security sys- indicator light ( model) position with the brake pedal depressed.
tems” later in this section. The light should turn off within 1 second after Part time 4WD
Slip indicator light turning the ignition switch to ON.
The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and
This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch is remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the
This indicator light will blink when the traction set in the 4LO position with the ignition key in the transmission into gear. If the transmission selec-
control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery ON position. tor lever is shifted from the N position to any other
road conditions may exist if the slip indicator gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the
blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the vehicle may move unexpectedly.
accordingly. switch while driving.
When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the
The slip indicator light also comes on when you Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever
turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to the N position with the brake pedal depressed,
will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is to 4LO. then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to
operational. If the light does not come on or does 4LO or 4H.
Instruments and controls 2-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving, Key reminder chime
between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle have the vehicle dynamic control system checked
and shift the transmission selector lever to the N by a NISSAN dealer. A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
position with the brake pedal depressed. while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
If the battery is removed or discharged, the ve- the key and take it with you when leaving the
Turn signal/hazard indicator hicle dynamic control system is disabled and the vehicle.
lights VDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON Light reminder chime
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal position. To reset the system, you must perform With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a
switch is activated. the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv- the headlights or parking lights are on.
on. ing” section of this manual.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
If the light does not go off after performing the ing the vehicle.
Vehicle dynamic control off reset procedure, have the traction control system
indicator light checked by a NISSAN dealer.
This indicator light comes on when the vehicle While the vehicle dynamic control system is op-
dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. This erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the
indicates the vehicle dynamic control system is system working when starting the vehicle or ac-
not operating. celerating, but this is normal.
Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again AUDIBLE REMINDERS
or restart the engine and the system will operate
normally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) Brake pad wear warning
system” in the “Starting and driving” section of The front disc brake pads have audible wear
this manual. warnings. When a front brake pad requires re-
The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on placement, it makes a high pitched scraping
when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or
The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the
system is operational. If the light comes on along brakes checked as soon as possible if the warn-
ing sound is heard.
2-20 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
SECURITY SYSTEMS

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, ● When the button is pushed with
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
well-lit areas whenever possible. minder that the doors are already locked.
Many devices offering additional protection, such The horn may or may not beep. Refer to
as component locks, identification markers, and “Silencing the horn beep feature” (vehicles
tracking systems, are available at auto supply without navigation system) in the “Pre-
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer driving checks and adjustments” section or
may also offer such equipment. Check with your “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with
insurance company to see if you may be eligible navigation system) in the “Display screen,
for discounts for various theft protection features. heater, air conditioner and audio systems”
section.
How to arm the vehicle security
system 4. Confirm that the indicator light comes
WIC0841
on. The light stays on for about 30
Your vehicle has two types of security systems: 1. Close all windows and the glass hatch. (The seconds. The vehicle security system is now
● Vehicle security system system can be armed even if the win- pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-
dows are open. However, the glass hicle security system automatically shifts
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System—NVIS hatch must be closed.) into the armed phase. The light begins
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
30-second pre-arm time period, the door is
The vehicle security system provides visual and 3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors can be locked with the key, power door lock ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a switch or with the keyfob. system will not arm.
motion detection type system that activates when
Keyfob operation: ● If the key is turned slowly when locking
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
the door, the system may not arm. Fur-
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot ● Push the button on the keyfob. thermore, if the key is turned beyond
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or All doors lock. The hazard lights flash the vertical position toward the unlock
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al- twice and the horn beeps once to indicate position to remove the key, the system
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a all doors are locked. may be disarmed when the key is re-
Instruments and controls 2-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
moved. If the indicator light fails to How to stop an activated alarm If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door ommends placing the registered NVIS key on a
once and lock it again. The alarm stops only by unlocking a door with the separate key ring to avoid interference from other
key, or by pressing the button on the key- devices.
● Even when the driver and/or passen- fob.
gers are in the vehicle, the system will Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
arm with all doors closed and locked NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
with the ignition key in the OFF posi- SYSTEM (NVIS) tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
tion. ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS)
This device complies with part 15 of the
Vehicle security system activation will not allow the engine to start without the use of
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
a registered NVIS key. Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm: If the engine fails to start using a registered NVIS ing two conditions;
key (for example, when interference is caused by (1) This device may not cause harmful in-
● The headlights blink and the horn sounds another NVIS key, an automated toll road device
intermittently. terference, and (2) this device must accept
or automatic payment device on the key ring), any interference received, including inter-
● The alarm automatically turns off after ap- restart the engine using the following proce- ference that may cause undesired opera-
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm dures: tion of the device.
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking for approximately 5 seconds. PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC-
a door with the key, or by pressing the TURER FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID
button on the keyfob. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE
position, and wait approximately 10 sec- THE EQUIPMENT.
The alarm is activated by: onds.
● opening a door without using the key or
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using
the inside lock knob or the power door lock 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
switch). (which may have caused the interference)
● opening the glass hatch without unlocking separate from the registered NVIS key.
the back door.
2-22 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH

NOTE:
You can turn on or turn off the driving
speed dependent intermittent wiper func-
tion for vehicles with navigation system.
Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems” section later in this manual.
s
2 Low — continuous low speed operation
s
3 High — continuous high speed operation
Push the lever up s4 to have one sweep opera-
tion of the wiper.
LIC0474 WIC0843 Pull the lever toward you s 5 to operate the

Security indicator light SWITCH OPERATION washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

The security indicator light blinks whenever the The windshield wiper and washer operates when WARNING
ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC the ignition switch is in the ON position.
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve- In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
hicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) is operational. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the tion may freeze on the windshield and
following speed: obscure your vision which may lead to an
If the NVIS is malfunctioning, the light will remain accident. Warm the windshield with the
on while the ignition key is in the ON position. s
1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can be defroster before you wash the windshield.
adjusted by turning the knob toward s A
If the light still remains on and/or the en- (Slower) or s B (Faster). Also, the intermit-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for CAUTION
tent operation speed varies in accordance
NVIS service as soon as possible. Please ● Do not operate the washer continu-
with the vehicle speed. (For example, when
bring all NVIS keys that you have when ously for more than 30 seconds.
visiting your NISSAN dealer for service. the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent
operation speed will be faster.) ● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH

● Do not fill the window washer reservoir WARNING


tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
based washer fluid concentrates may tion may freeze on the window and ob-
permanently stain the grille if spilled scure your vision. Warm the rear window
while filling the window washer reser- with the defroster before you wash the
voir tank. rear window.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with CAUTION


water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid ● Do not operate the washer continu-
into the window washer reservoir tank. ously for more than 30 seconds.
Do not use the window washer reservoir ● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
tank to mix the washer fluid concen- voir tank is empty.
trate and water. WIC0844 ● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
The rear window wiper and washer operate when tank with washer fluid concentrates at
the ignition switch is in the ON position. full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position permanently stain the grille if spilled
to operate the wiper. while filling the window washer reser-
s
1 Intermittent – intermittent operation (not ad- voir tank.
justable) ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
s
2 On – continuous low speed operation
mended levels before pouring the fluid
Push the switch forward s 3 to operate the into the window washer reservoir tank.
washer. The wiper will also operate several times. Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-
trate and water.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
MIRROR (if so equipped) SWITCH
DEFROSTER SWITCH

LIC0782 LIC0783 LIC0560


Type A Type B Type A
To defrost the rear window glass and outside HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The Lighting
rear window defroster indicator light comes on.
Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. s
1 When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
The rear window defroster automatically turns off instrument panel lights come on.
after approximately 15 minutes.
s
2 When turning the switch to the posi-
CAUTION tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LIC0687 LIC0688 LIC0561
Type B Type C Autolight system (if so equipped)
CAUTION The autolight system allows the headlights to be
Use the headlights with the engine run- set so they turn on and off automatically. The
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle autolight system can:
battery.
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
tomatically when it is dark.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
you turn the key to OFF and all doors are
closed.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff is adjust-
able for vehicles with navigation system.
See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems” section later in this manual.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion s1 .

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.


3. The autolight system automatically turns the
LIC0835 LIC0562
headlights on and off.
Be sure you do not put anything on top of Headlight beam select
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a the autolight sensor s 1 located on the top
door is opened and left open, the headlights side of the instrument panel. The autolight s
1 To select the high beam function, push the
remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- lever forward. The high beam lights come on
opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is and the light illuminates.
timer is reset. dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to If this occurs while parked with the engine s
2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
the OFF, , or position. off and the key in the ON position, your s
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
vehicle’s battery could become discharged. headlight high beams on and off.
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the
headlight switch is in the or posi-
tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
After the headlights automatically turn off with the
WARNING
headlight switch in the or position,
the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if When the daytime running light system is
the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
and then turned to the or position. on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
CAUTION an accident injuring yourself and others.

Even though the battery saver feature au-


tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
LIC0759
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only) INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with The instrument brightness control operates when
the parking brake released. The daytime running the headlight control switch is in the
lights operate with the headlight switch in the , or AUTO position (with autolights
OFF position or in the position. Turn the activated).
headlight switch to the position for full Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-
illumination when driving at night. ment panel lights when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is turned off.
2-28 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH

LIC0563 LIC0393 LIC0394


TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch you must stop or park under emergency condi-
to the position, then turn the fog light tions. All turn signal lights flash.
s
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the switch to the position. To turn them off,
turning direction. When the turn is com- turn the fog light switch to the OFF position. WARNING
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.
The headlights must be on and the low beams ● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
Lane change signal selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog move the vehicle well off the road.
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
s
2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
headlights are selected. ● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
down to the point where the indicator light while moving on the highway unless
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-


ard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

LIC0604 LIC0469

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if
the steering wheel. so equipped).

WARNING 1. Start the engine.

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so 2. Push the (low) or (high) posi-
could affect proper operation of the tion of the switch, as desired, depending on
supplemental front air bag system. Tam- the temperature. The indicator light in the
pering with the supplemental front air bag switch will illuminate.
system may result in serious personal The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
injury.
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH

3. When the seat is warmed or before you ● The battery could run down if the seat
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch heater is operated while the engine is
off. not running.

CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
WIC0534
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
heater. Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
ing conditions.
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
dry cloth. system reduces the engine output to reduce
● When cleaning the seat, never use wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
lar materials. maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
● If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch off and have the system checked switch. The indicator will come on.
by your NISSAN dealer. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine
to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dynamic control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.
Instruments and controls 2-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC)
SWITCH (if so equipped)

● The hill descent control may not control ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4H position
the vehicle speed on a hill under all load and the vehicle speed must be under 21
or road conditions. Always be prepared mph (35 km/h), and
to depress the brake pedal to control ● the HDC system switch must be ON.
vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-
sult in a collision or serious personal The HDC indicator light will come on when the
injury. system is activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illu-
minate while the HDC system applies the brakes
to control vehicle speed.
CAUTION
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed
When the hill descent control system op-
while the HDC system is on, the system will stop
erates continuously for a long time, the
operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator
temperature of the brake pads may in-
or brake pedal is released, the HDC system
crease and the hill descent control system
begins to function again if the HDC operating
LIC0743 may be temporarily disabled (the indicator
conditions are fulfilled.
light will blink). If the indicator light does
WARNING not come on continuously after blinking, The HDC indicator light blinks if the switch is on
● Never rely solely on the hill descent stop using the system. and all conditions for system activation are not
control system to control vehicle speed met or if the system becomes disengaged for any
The hill descent control system is designed to reason.
when driving on steep downhill grades. reduce driver workload when going down steep
Always drive carefully when using the hills. The HDC system helps to control vehicle To turn off the HDC system, push the switch to
hill descent control system and decel- speed so the driver can concentrate on steering the OFF position.
erate the vehicle speed by depressing the vehicle.
the brake pedal if necessary. Be espe- For additional information, see “Hill descent con-
cially careful when driving on frozen, To activate the HDC system: trol (HDC) system on indicator light” earlier in this
muddy or extremely steep downhill section and “Hill descent control (HDC) system”
● the automatic transmission selector lever in the “Starting and driving” section of this
roads. Failure to control vehicle speed
must be in forward or reverse gear, manual.
may result in a loss of control of the
vehicle and possible serious injury or ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4L position
death. and the vehicle speed must be under 15
mph (25 km/h) or
2-32 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
POWER OUTLET

LIC0760 LIC0761 LIC0762


Front row Center console Luggage area — Type A
The power outlets are for powering electrical CAUTION ● Use power outlets with the engine run-
accessories such as cellular telephones. ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
● The outlet and plug may be hot during battery.
The bottom power outlet located on instrument or immediately after use.
panel and the power outlet located in the cargo ● Avoid using power outlets when the air
area are powered directly by the vehicle’s battery. ● Only certain power outlets are designed conditioner, headlights or rear window
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do defroster is on.
The top power outlet located on the instrument not use any other power outlet for an
panel and the power outlet located inside the accessory lighter. See your NISSAN ● Before inserting or disconnecting a
center console are powered only when the igni- dealer for additional information. plug, be sure the electrical accessory
tion key is in the ACC or ON position. being used is turned OFF.
● Do not use with accessories that ex-
Open the cap to use a power outlet. ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
STORAGE

LIC0763 LIC0764 LIC0767


Luggage area — Type B Top center tray (if so equipped) Bottom center tray (if so equipped)
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If STORAGE TRAYS
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature WARNING
fuse may open. Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
● When not in use, be sure to close the help prevent injury in an accident or sud-
cap. Do not allow water to contact the den stop.
outlet.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WIC0830 LIC0765 LIC0776
Right-hand side 3rd row tray Front row bin Left-hand side 3rd row bin (if so equipped)
STORAGE BINS

Instruments and controls 2-35

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LIC0875 LIC0766
2ND ROW UNDER-SEAT STORAGE CONSOLE BOX
BIN
WARNING
To access the under-seat storage bins:
The center console box should not be
s
1 Tip up the 2nd row bench seat. Refer to “Tip used while driving so full attention may be
up for easy entry to the 3rd row” in the given to vehicle operation.
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section earlier in this Pull up on the lever s
1 to open the console box lid
manual. s2 .

s
2 Fold up the bottom cushion of the center
seat.
s
3 Push the latch to release the storage bin
cover.

2-36 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC0768 WIC0673
GLOVE BOX SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the top portion of the glove box, push the To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
latch s
A up and raise the lid.

To open the lower portion of the glove box, pull WARNING


the handle s
B down and lower the lid. ● The sunglasses holder should not be
Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove used while driving so full attention may
box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or be given to vehicle operation.
unlock the glove box. ● Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to CAUTION
help prevent injury in an accident or a ● Do not use for anything other than
sudden stop. sunglasses.

Instruments and controls 2-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LIC0772 LIC0575 LIC0769
MAP POCKETS SEAT POCKETS
A pocket is located on the back of the driver’s
seat. A small pocket is also located on the in-
board side of the passenger’s seat.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

LIC0770 WIC0771
Front 2nd row (rear of front console)
CUP HOLDERS To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front
console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.
The front cup holders have adapters that can be
removed to accommodate larger cups.

WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.

Instruments and controls 2-39

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LIC0773 LIC0774 LIC0784
3rd row — Type A 3rd row — Type B Bottle holder
CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.

2-40 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure
cargo.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage area. It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.
LIC0777 In a collision, people riding in these WTI0125
areas are more likely to be seriously
CARGO AREA STORAGE injured or killed. Side finisher
To access the floor storage area, push down s 1 ● Do not allow people to ride in any area When hooking on ropes, do not apply a load of
to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle s
2 of your vehicle that is not equipped with more than 55 lb (245 N) to a single s
A hook or 44
to lift the luggage board. seats and seat belts. lb (196 N) to a single s
B hook.

LUGGAGE HOOKS ● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a


seat and using a seat belt properly.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo
with ropes or other types of straps.

Instruments and controls 2-41

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LTI0126 LIC0778

Floor hooks Large net (if so equipped)


CARGO NETS The cargo nets help keep packages in the cargo
Do not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N) area from moving around while the vehicle is in
to a single hook. motion.
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo to help pre- To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not retainers.
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks from
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured the cargo net retainers.
cargo could cause personal injury.
● Be sure to secure all four hooks into the
retainers. The cargo restrained in the
net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or
the net may not stay secured.

2-42 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LIC0793 LIC0794 LIC0795
Right-hand luggage side Left-hand luggage side net Back door net
net (if so equipped) To install a luggage side net, attach the net to the The back door net is not removable.
retainers. To remove, detach the net from the
WARNING
retainers. WARNING
● The cargo restrained in the luggage
side nets must not exceed 8.5 lb (3.9 kg) ● The cargo restrained in the back door
for each net or the net may not stay net must not exceed 2 lb (1 kg) or the
secured. net may not stay secured.

● Do not place sharp objects in the lug- ● Do not place sharp objects in the lug-
gage side nets. Such objects may be- gage side nets. Such objects may be-
come dangerous projectiles and cause come dangerous projectiles and cause
injury when the vehicle is moving or if injury when the vehicle is moving or if
the vehicle is involved in a collision. the vehicle is involved in a collision.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
The front and rear cross bars (if so equipped) can
be adjusted or removed.
To adjust:
1. Loosen the 2 TorxT head fasteners s
A on
both ends of the crossbar.
2. Remove the plugs at the desired position
(s
C –sF ).

3. Slide the crossbar s B to the desired position


(sC –s F ) so that the holes in the crossbar
line up with the holes in the sidebar.
4. Tighten the 2 TorxT head fasteners on both
ends of the crossbar.
5. Reinstall the plugs at the previous position
s
A.

6. Position your luggage on the crossbars and


secure the luggage with rope.
7. Always check the tightness of the TorxT
head fasteners.
LIC0779
To remove:
ROOF RACK rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label (located 1. Loosen the 2 TorxT head fasteners s
A on
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof on the driver’s door pillar). For more information both ends of the crossbar.
rack. Do not load more than 220 pounds (100 regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle 2. Remove the crossbar from the roof rack.
kg). Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed loading information” in the “Technical and con-
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its sumer information” section later in this manual.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and
2-44 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WINDOWS

WARNING POWER WINDOWS


Properly secure all cargo with ropes or WARNING
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un- ● Make sure that all passengers have
secured cargo could cause personal their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
injury. it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
CAUTION to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
Use care when placing or removing items
from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort- ● Do not leave children unattended inside
ably lift the items onto the roof rack from the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
the ground, use a ladder or stool. tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious LIC0785
accidents. 1. Window lock button
The power windows operate when the ignition 2. Power door lock switch
switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 3. Front passenger side window switch
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the 4. Right rear passenger window switch
OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door 5. Left rear passenger window switch
is opened during this period of about 45 sec- 6. Driver side automatic switch
onds, power to the windows is canceled.
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close the front and rear
passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and hold it
down. To close a window, pull the switch and
hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function
at any time, simply release the switch.
Instruments and controls 2-45

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LIC0786 LIC0787 LIC0410
Front passenger power window switch Rear power window switch Automatic operation
The passenger window switch operates only the The rear passenger window switches open or To fully open a window equipped with automatic
corresponding passenger window. To open the close only the corresponding passenger window. operation, press the window switch down to the
window, push the switch and hold it down s1 . To To open the window, push the switch and hold it second detent and release it; it need not be held.
close the window, pull the switch up s2 . down s 1 . To close the window, pull the switch up
The window automatically opens all the way. To
s2 .
stop the window, lift the switch up while the
Locking passengers’ windows window is opening.

When the window lock button is depressed, only To fully close a window equipped with automatic
the driver side window can be opened or closed. operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
Push it again to cancel the window lock function. and release it; it need not be held.
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
2-46 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
SUNROOF (if so equipped)

Depending on the environment or driving To open or close the sunroof part way, push the
conditions, the auto-reverse function may switch in any direction while the sunroof is sliding
be activated if an impact or load similar to to stop it in the desired position.
something being caught in the window oc-
curs. Tilting the sunroof
Close the sunroof by pushing the switch toward
WARNING UP/CLOSE s 2 . Release the switch, then push
There are some small distances immedi- the UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt the sunroof
ately before the closed position which up.
cannot be detected. Make sure that all To tilt the sunroof down, push the switch toward
passengers have their hands, etc., inside DOWN/OPEN s 1 .
the vehicle before closing the window.
If the control unit detects something caught in a WARNING
window equipped with automatic operation as it WIC0882 ● In an accident you could be thrown from
is closing, the window will be immediately low- the vehicle through an open sunroof.
ered.
AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
Always use seat belts and child
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition restraints.
key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the extend any portion of their body out of
ignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position. the sunroof opening while the vehicle is
If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door in motion or while the sunroof is
is opened during this period of about 45 sec- closing.
onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.
Sliding the sunroof CAUTION
To fully open the sunroof, push the switch toward ● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
DOWN/OPEN s 1 . from the sunroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-
To fully close the sunroof, push the switch toward
roof or surrounding area.
UP/CLOSE s 2 .

Instruments and controls 2-47

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Auto reverse function (when closing or If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re- If the sunroof does not close
tilting down the sunroof) peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
The auto reverse function can be activated when sunroof.
the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic after it happens, then the sunroof will fully close
operation when the ignition key is in the ON gradually. In this case, make sure nothing is
position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition caught in the sunroof.
key is turned to the OFF position.
WARNING
Depending on the environment or driving
● In an accident you could be thrown from
conditions, the auto reverse function may
the vehicle through an open sunroof.
be activated if an impact or load similar to Always use seat belts and child
something being caught in the sunroof oc- restraints.
curs.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
WARNING extend any portion of their body out of
the sunroof opening while the vehicle is
There are some small distances immedi- in motion or while the sunroof is
ately before the closed position which closing.
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
CAUTION
the vehicle before closing the sunroof.
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
When closing: from the sunroof before opening.
If the control unit detects something caught in the ● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-
sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will roof or surrounding area.
immediately open backward.
When tilting down:
Sunshade
If the control unit detects something caught in the Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi- ward or backward.
ately tilt up.
2-48 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
INTERIOR LIGHTS

The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is


activated when:
● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a
key, or the power door lock switch.
● The ignition switch is turned ON.
The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-
utes while doors are open to prevent the battery
from becoming discharged.
When the switch is in the OFF position s 3 , the
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position.

LIC0789 LIC0792 CAUTION


Type A Type B Do not use for extended periods of time
● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key with the engine stopped. This could result
The interior lights have a three-position switch or the power door lock switch while all doors in a discharged battery.
and operate regardless of ignition switch posi- are closed and the ignition switch is in the
tion. OFF position.
When the switch is in the ON position s 1 , the ● The driver’s door is opened and then closed
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi- while the key is removed from the ignition
tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes switch.
unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON ● The key is removed from the ignition switch
position. while all doors are closed.
When the switch is in the O position s 2 , the
interior lights will stay on for about 30 seconds
when:

Instruments and controls 2-49

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped) MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT

LIC0790 LIC0791 LIC0590


To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-
To turn the personal lights on, press the switches. turn them off, press the switches again. position switch. To operate, push the switch to
To turn them off, press the switches again. the desired position.
CAUTION ON: The light is illuminated.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
Do not use for extended periods of time Normal (center) position: The light illuminates
with the engine stopped. This could result
with the engine stopped. This could result when any door is opened or unlocked by the
in a discharged battery.
in a discharged battery. keyfob. The light turns off after 30 seconds when
all doors are closed.
OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of
door position or lock status.

2-50 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
HOMELINKT UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides a


WARNING
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into ● Do not use the HomeLinkT Universal
one built-in device. Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver: verse features as required by federal
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) safety standards. (These standards be-
devices such as garage doors, gates, home came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
rage door opener which cannot detect
curity systems.
an object in the path of a closing garage
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No door and then automatically stop and
separate batteries are required. If the vehi- reverse, does not meet current federal
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- safety standards. Using a garage door
nected, HomeLinkT will retain all program- opener without these features in- LIC0526
ming. creases the risk of serious injury or
death. PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT
Once the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver 1. To begin, press and hold the two outer
● During the programming procedure
is programmed, retain the original trans- HomeLinkT buttons (to clear the memory)
your garage door or security gate will
mitter for future programming procedures
open and close (if the transmitter is until the indicator light s
1 blinks (after 20
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon within range). Make sure that people or seconds). Release both buttons.
sale of the vehicle, the programmed objects are clear of the garage door,
HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttons 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
gate, etc. that you are programming. 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
should be erased for security purposes. For
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned HomeLinkT surface.
additional information refer to “Program-
ming HomeLinkT” later in this section. off while programming the HomeLinkT
Universal Transceiver.

Instruments and controls 2-51

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator NOTE:
light on the HomeLinkT flashes, changing
Once you have pressed and released the
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing program button on the garage door open-
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- Use the help of a second person for conve-
ing light indicates successful programming. nience to assist when performing this step.
To activate the garage door or other pro-
grammed device, press and hold the pro- 7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-
grammed HomeLinkT button — releasing ing the garage door opener program button,
quickly and firmly press and release the
when the device begins to activate.
HomeLinkT button you’ve just programmed.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkT blinks Press and release the HomeLinkT button up
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, to 3 times to complete the training.
LIC0527 HomeLinkT has picked up a “rolling code” 8. Your HomeLinkT button should now be pro-
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and garage door opener signal. You will need to grammed. (To program the remaining
hold both the HomeLinkT button you want to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLinkT buttons for additional door or
program and the hand-held transmitter but- HomeLinkT to complete the programming gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.)
ton. which may require a ladder and another per-
son for convenience. NOTE:
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed. 6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
gram button located on the garage door “clear” all previously programmed
opener’s motor to activate the “training HomeLinkT buttons.
mode”. This button is usually located near If you have any questions or are having difficulty
the antenna wire that hangs down from the programming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer to
motor. If the wire originates from under a the HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.com
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to or call 1-800-355-3515.
access the program button.

2-52 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FOR PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- If the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the hand- Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- held transmitter information: to clear all programming, press and hold the two
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to outside buttons and release when the indicator
● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
HomeLinkT, continue to press and hold the light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
with new batteries.
HomeLinkT button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-
gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re- ● position the hand-held transmitter with its REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every battery area facing away from the HOMELINKT BUTTON
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly HomeLinkT surface. To reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver
(indicating successful programming).
● press and hold both the HomeLinkT and button, complete the following.
NOTE: hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT but-
ruption. ton. Do not release the button until step 4
When programming a garage door opener,
● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 has been completed.
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos- inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the 2. When the indicator light begins to flash
sible damage to the garage door opener HomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter in slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
components. that position for up to 15 seconds. If hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76
HomeLinkT is not programmed within that mm) away from the HomeLinkT surface.
OPERATING THE HOMELINKT time, try holding the transmitter in another
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER position – keeping the indicator light in view 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
at all times. button.
The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- If you continue to have programming difficulties, 4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash, first
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
propriate programmed HomeLinkT Universal Department. The phone numbers are located in light begins to flash rapidly, release both
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will the Foreword of this manual. buttons.
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

Instruments and controls 2-53

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button has This transmitter has been tested and com-
now been reprogrammed. The new device can plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkT button Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
that was just programmed. This procedure will proved by the party responsible for compli-
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkT ance could void the user’s authority to op-
buttons. erate the device.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the FCC I.D. CV2V67690
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLinkT Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference and (2) This de-
vice must accept any interference that may
be received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

2-54 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Fuel filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10


Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Inside mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Back door release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Glass hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Opening the fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
KEYS

A key number is only necessary when you have previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer cess, these components will only recognize keys
can duplicate it. coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem (NVIS) during registration. Any key that is not
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER given to your dealer at the time of registration will
SYSTEM (NVIS) KEYS no longer be able to start your vehicle.
You can only drive your vehicle using the master Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN contains an electrical transponder, to come into
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your contact with salt water. This could affect system
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in function.
the key head.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
WPD0128
1. Two master keys (black) with transpon- The valet key cannot be used for the glove box
lock.
der chip and chrome NISSAN brand
symbol on one side To protect belongings when you leave a key with
2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip someone, give them the valet key only.
3. Key number plate Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
4. Transponder chip
Additional or replacement keys:
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place If you still have a key, the key number is not
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
using the key number. NISSAN does not record cate your existing key. As many as five NVIS keys
key numbers so it is very important to keep track can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all
of your key number plate. NVIS keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer
for registration. This is because the registration
process will erase the memory of all key codes
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
DOORS

WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● Do not leave children unattended inside LPD0240 LPD0298
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- Driver’s side Inside lock
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri- LOCKING WITH KEY LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
ous accidents. The power door lock system allows you to lock or KNOB
unlock all doors at the same time. To lock the door without the key, move the inside
Turning the key toward the front s
1 of the vehicle lock knob to the lock position s
1 , then close the
locks all doors. door.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s


2 of the To unlock the door without the key, move the
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, inside lock knob to the unlock position s
2 .
returning the key to neutral s
3 (where the key can
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
all doors s4 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the key in the ignition and any door
open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically.
This helps to prevent the keys from being acci-
dently locked inside the vehicle.

LPD0183 LPD0299
Door lock switch CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
LOCK SWITCH from being opened accidentally, especially when
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door small children are in the vehicle.
lock switch (driver or front passenger side), to the The child safety lock levers are located on the
lock position s 1 . When locking the door this way,
edge of the rear doors.
be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
When the lever is in the lock position, the
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door can be opened only from the outside.
door lock switch (driver or front passenger side)
to the unlock position s
2 .

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on the


CAUTION
interior lights, and activate the panic alarm by
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the keyfob:
Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,
can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigation ● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.
system, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature” ● Do not drop the keyfob.
later in this section. For vehicles with navigation
● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
system, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in
another object.
the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems” section later in this manual. ● Do not place the keyfob for an extended
period in an area where temperatures
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle exceed 140°F (60°C).
before locking the doors.
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of ommends erasing the ID code of that key- LPD0209
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
effective distance depends upon the conditions authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
around the vehicle. information regarding the erasing proce-
ENTRY SYSTEM
dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. Locking doors
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase 1. Close all windows.
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN
dealer. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Close the hood and all doors.
The keyfob will not function when:
4. Push the button on the keyfob. All
● the battery is discharged.
the doors lock. The hazard warning lights
● the distance between the vehicle and the flash twice and the horn beeps once to
keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m). indicate all doors are locked.
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● When the button is pushed with all ● All doors unlock.
doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash
● The hazard warning lights flash once if all
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
doors are completely closed.
minder that the doors are already locked.
The interior lights can be turned off without wait-
● If a door is open and you push the
ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the
button, the doors will lock but the horn will
ignition and turning to the ON or START position,
not beep and the hazard warning lights will
locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the
not flash.
interior light switch to the off position.
The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles
without navigation system, refer to “Silencing the Auto relock
horn beep feature” later in this section. For ve- When the button on the keyfob is pushed,
hicles with navigation system, refer to “Vehicle all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute
electronic systems” in the “Display screen, unless one of the following operations is per-
heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec- LPD0210 formed:
tion later in this manual.
Unlocking doors ● Any door is opened.
Push the button on the keyfob once. ● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and
the key is turned from OFF to ON.
● Only the driver’s door unlocks.
● The hazard warning lights flash once if all Linking the keyfob to automatic drive
doors are completely closed with the ignition positioner memory
key in any position except the ON position.
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive
● The interior lights turn on and the light timer positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory
activates for 30 seconds when the interior setting.
light switch is in the DOOR position with the
See “Automatic driver positioner” later in this
ignition key in any position except the ON
section.
position.
Push the button on the keyfob again within
5 seconds.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
Using the interior lights
LPD0211 LPD0262
Push the button on the keyfob once to turn
Using the panic alarm Silencing the horn beep feature on the interior lights.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti- For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention vated using the keyfob. in the “Instruments and controls” section earlier in
by pushing and holding the button on the this manual.
keyfob for longer than 0.5 second. NOTE:
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 If you change the horn beep and lamp flash
seconds. feature with the keyfob, the display screen
The panic alarm stops when: (if so equipped) will not show the current
mode and cannot be used to change the
● it has run for 25 seconds, or mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-
● any button is pushed on the keyfob. vious mode and re-enable the display
screen control.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
HOOD BACK DOOR

WARNING WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely ● Always be sure the back door has been
closed and latched before driving. Fail- closed securely to prevent it from open-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly ing while driving.
open and result in an accident.
● Do not drive with the back door open.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from This could allow dangerous exhaust
the engine compartment, to avoid injury gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See
do not open the hood. “Exhaust gas” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle be-
fore closing the back door.
LPD0302

s
1 Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver side instrument panel. The
hood will spring up slightly.
s
2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the
side as illustrated with your fingertips and
raise the hood.
s
3 Insert the support rod into the slot on the
underside of the hood.
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make
sure it locks into place.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
GLASS HATCH

LPD0300 LPD0251 LPD0301


The power door lock system allows you to lock or BACK DOOR RELEASE To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle to
unlock all doors including the back door simulta- release the glass hatch, then pull up on the glass
neously. If the back door cannot be locked or unlocked hatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatch
with the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a
To open the back door, pull up on the handle. down securely.
discharged battery, follow these steps:
To close, lower and push the back door down 1. Remove the cover on the inside of the back
securely. door.
2. Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
FUEL FILLER LID

NOTE:
The back door must be unlocked in order to
open the glass hatch.

WARNING
Do not drive with the glass hatch open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust
gas” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.

LPD0303 LPD0253
OPENING THE FUEL FILLER LID FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler lid automatically unlocks when all The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
doors are unlocked. cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
1. Unlock the fuel filler lid using one of the the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
following operations. heard.
● Unlock all doors with the keyfob. Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder s
1 while
refueling.
● Unlock all doors with the key.
● Press the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
2. Push the lid to open.
To lock, close the fuel filler lid and lock the doors.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING ● Do not fill a portable fuel container in ● Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and can cause an explosion of flammable
highly explosive under certain condi- properly may cause the mal-
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
tions. You could be burned or seriously trailer. To reduce the risk of serious function indicator lamp (MIL) to illumi-
injured if it is misused or mishandled. injury or death when filling portable fuel nate. If the lamp illuminates be-
Always stop the engine and do not containers:
smoke or allow open flames or sparks cause the fuel filler cap is loose or
near the vehicle when refueling. – Always place the container on the missing, tighten or install the cap and
ground when filling. continue to drive the vehicle.
● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the
– Do not use electronic devices when The lamp should turn off after a
cap a third of a turn, and wait for any
“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel filling. few driving trips. If the lamp
from spraying out and possibly causing – Keep the pump nozzle in contact does not turn off after a few driving
personal injury. Then remove the cap. with the container while you are fill- trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank ing it. NISSAN dealer.
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off – Use only approved portable fuel con- ● For additional information, see the
automatically. Continued refueling may tainers for flammable liquid. “Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” in
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
the “Instruments and Controls” section
spray and possibly a fire.
CAUTION earlier in this manual.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a ● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
built-in safety valve needed for proper flush it away with water to avoid paint
operation of the fuel system and emis- damage.
sion control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if so
equipped)

CAUTION
Do not adjust the pedal position with your
foot on the pedal.

LPD0304 LPD0305
TILT OPERATION The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-
justed for driving comfort.
Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the
steering wheel up or down to the desired posi- Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the
tion. brake and accelerator pedal position forward s
1
or backward s2 . Pedal adjustment can only be
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel
in place. performed when:
● Ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC posi-
WARNING tion
Do not adjust the steering wheel while ● Ignition switch is ON and the selector lever
driving. You could lose control of your is in the P (Park) position
vehicle and cause an accident.
The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-
justed separately.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
SUN VISORS

s
3 Slide the extension sun visor in or out as
needed.

CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before return-
ing the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-
edly downward.

WPD0307
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.

WPD0315

s
1 To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
s
2 To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
MIRRORS

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE


MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally changes reflection according to the intensity
of the headlights of the vehicle following you.

WPD0126 LPD0258

INSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) Type A


Type A
The night position s 1 reduces glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you at night. When the switch is in the ON position, the
indicator light s1 will illuminate and excessive
Use the day position s
2 when driving in daylight
glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind
hours.
you will be reduced. When the switch on the
inside mirror is in the OFF position, the inside
WARNING mirror will operate normally.
Use the night position only when neces- For information on HomeLinkT Universal Trans-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity. ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkT Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-
tion of this manual.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
WPD0309 LPD0237
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
Type B OUTSIDE MIRRORS defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
Type B tional information, see “Rear window and outside
The outside mirror remote control will operate mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the
Excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
behind you will automatically be reduced. “Instrument and controls” section of this manual.
position.
Move the small switch s 1 to select the right or left
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
using the large switch s 2 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system has two


features:
● Memory storage function
● Entry/exit function

LPD0259 LPD0306
Foldable outside mirrors MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. Two positions for the driver’s seat, accelerator
and brake pedals, and outside mirrors can be
stored in the automatic drive positioner memory.
Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-
tem.
1. Set the automatic transmission selector le-
ver to the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition ON.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator and 1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi- 1. Open and close the driver’s door more than
brake pedals, and outside mirrors to the tion. two times with the ignition key in the LOCK
desired positions by manually operating position.
2. While the indicator light for the memory
each adjusting switch. For additional infor-
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec- 2. Reset the desired position using the previ-
mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, onds, press the button on the keyfob. ous procedure.
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- The indicator light will blink. After the indica-
tem” section and “Pedal position adjust- tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that Selecting the memorized position
ment” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in this memory setting.
section. 1. Set the automatic transmission selector le-
With the key removed from the ignition switch, ver to the P (Park) position.
During this step, do not turn the ignition to press the button on the keyfob. The driv-
any position other than ON. er’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and out- 2. Turn the ignition ON.
side mirrors will move to the memorized position. 3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.
NOTE:
least 1 second. The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake
If a new memory is saved to the memory pedals, and outside mirrors will move to the
The indicator light for the pushed memory switch, the keyfob must be re-linked.
switch will come on and stay on for approxi- memorized position with the indicator light
mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. Confirming memory storage blinking, and then the light will stay on for
After the indicator light goes off, the se- approximately 5 seconds.
● Turn the ignition ON and push the SET
lected positions are stored in the selected ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
switch. If the main memory has not been
memory (1 or 2).
stored, the indicator light will come on for
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat
If a new memory is stored in the same memory approximately 0.5 seconds. When the
will automatically move when the automatic
switch, the previous memory will be deleted. memory has stored the position, the indica-
transmission selector lever is in the P (Park)
tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-
Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position. This allows the driver to get into and out
onds.
of the driver’s seat more easily.
position
● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
The driver’s seat will slide backward:
Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow- such a case, reset the desired positions ● When the driver’s door is opened with the
ing procedure. using the following procedures. ignition key turned to LOCK.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● When the ignition key is turned from ACC to ● When any two or more of the memory
LOCK with the driver’s door open while the switches are simultaneously pushed while
automatic transmission selector lever is in the automatic drive positioner is operating.
the P (Park) position. ● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi- seat is turned on while the automatic drive
tion: positioner is operating.

● When the key is inserted into the ignition ● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is not
switch. pushed for at least 1 second.

● When the driver’s door is closed with the key ● When the seat has been already moved to
the memorized position.
turned to LOCK.
● When no seat position is stored in the
● When the key is turned from ACC to ON
memory switch.
while the automatic transmission selector
lever is in the P (Park) position. The automatic drive positioner system can be
adjusted and canceled. For vehicles with naviga-
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can- tion system, see “Vehicle electronic systems” in
celed. For vehicles with navigation system, see the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
“Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Display audio systems” section of this manual. For ve-
screen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys- hicles without navigation system, see your
tems” section of this manual. For vehicles without NISSAN dealer.
navigation system, see your NISSAN dealer.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will not
work or will stop operating under the following
conditions:
● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
km/h).

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19


4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner
and audio systems

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Names of the components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
How to use joystick and “ENTER” button . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
How to use “PREV” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
How to use the “TRIP” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-25
How to use the “SETTING” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Setting the display (Audio or HVAC display): . . . . . . 4-7 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
Heater and air conditioner (manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-16 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Steering wheel switch for audio control
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Rear control button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Playing a digital video disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if so
equipped)

WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. LHA0487
When you use this system, make sure the engine Reference symbols:
is running.
“ENTER” button — This is a button on the con-
If you use the system with the engine not trol panel.
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
“Display” key — This is a select key on the HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND If you do not touch the button or screen key for
screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to “ENTER” BUTTON more than 1 minute on the TRIP, SETTING or
the next function. START-UP screen, the screen will change to
Choose an item on the display using the joystick TRIP screen automatically.
NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS and push the “ENTER” button for operation.
To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate
1. brightness control button (P. 4-12) Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON
2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-3)
This button has two functions.
3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3)
● Go back to the previous display (cancel).
4. SETTING button (P. 4-7)
If you touch “PREV” button during setup, the
5. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-4) setup will be canceled and/or the display will
return to the previous screen.
6. DEST button*
● Finish setup.
7. ROUTE button*
If you touch this button after the setup is com-
8. MAP button*
pleted, the setup will start over, and the display
9. GUIDE VOICE button* will return to the climate control or audio mode
and Navigation screen.
10. zoom out button*
11. zoom in button* SETTING UP THE START-UP
SCREEN
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the
Manual. SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the
screen. Read the warning and select the “I
AGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Français) key
then push the “ENTER” button.
If you do not push the “ENTER” button, the
Navigation system will not proceed to the next
step display.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LHA0398 LHA0399 LHA0402
HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTON Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy items Maintenance items
When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following To reset the TRIP 1, TRIP 2 and FUEL You can set the engine oil and the tire rotation
modes will display on the screen. ECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using the interval.
joystick and push the “ENTER” button or push
Warning message (if there are any) → TRIP 1 To display the setting of the maintenance interval,
the “TRIP” button for more than approximately
(Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, Average select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key
1.5 seconds.
Speed) → TRIP 2 → FUEL ECONOMY (Average using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button.
Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty) → MAINTE-
NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and Tire Pres-
sure — if so equipped) → OFF.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LHA0400 LHA0401 LHA0483
To set the maintenance interval, select the The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“EN-
“Maintenance Schedule” key by using the joy- GINE OIL” and “TIRE ROTATION”) will be auto-
stick and push the joystick to right or left. matically displayed as shown when both of the
To reset the maintenance interval, select the “Re- following conditions are met:
set” key using the joystick and push the “EN- ● the vehicle is driven the set distance and the
TER” button. ignition key is turned OFF.
To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ● the ignition key is turned ON the next time
automatically when set trip distance is reached, the vehicle will be driving.
select the “Display Maintenance Notifica-
tion” key and push the “ENTER” button. To return to the previous display after the “MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, press
the PREV button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen displays Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
each time the key is turned ON until one of the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the
following conditions are met: outside temperature.
● “RESET” is selected. In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-
played on the screen:
● “Display Maintenance and Notification” is
set OFF. FLAT TIRE — low tire air pressure.
● the maintenance interval is set again.
WARNING
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-
cated and the low tire pressure warning
system will not function. Contact your
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire
LHA0403
replacement and/or system resetting.
Tire pressure information
To view “TIRE PRESSURE” information, push the
“TRIP” button repeatedly until the “MAINTE-
NANCE” screen is displayed. Select “TIRE
PRESSURE” using the joystick and push the
“ENTER” button.
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-
cates that the pressure is being measured. After
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on
the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
SETTING THE DISPLAY (Audio or Display Off:
HVAC display): To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING”
The audio or HVAC reading can be displayed at button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-
the bottom of the screen. Choose the “Audio” or play Off” key. The indicator of the “Display
“HVAC” (Heater and air conditioner) key to be Off” will turn to amber. When any mode button is
displayed at the bottom, by using the joystick and pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on
pressing the ENTER button to select or deselect for further operation. The screen will turn off
the key. The setting condition will normally appear automatically 5 seconds after the operation is
on the screen. To return to the setting screen, finished on the map display in the Audio, HVAC
push the “SETTING” button or “PREV” button. (Heater and air conditioner), SETTING or VE-
HICLE INFO modes.
Display settings To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”
The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear af- button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-
LHA0268 ter pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting play Off” key, then set the screen to on by
“Display” key and pushing the “ENTER” but- pushing the “ENTER” button.
HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”
ton. Setting Audio or HVAC display:
BUTTON
Brightness/Contrast/Map Background: Choose the “Audio” or “HVAC” (Heater and air
To adjust the various settings within the display
screen press the“SETTING” button. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the conditioner) key to be displayed at the bottom, by
screen, select the “Brightness/contrast” key using the joystick. The audio or HVAC setting
After pressing the SETTING button a menu will and push the “ENTER” button. You can then use condition will normally appear on the screen. To
be shown on the display screen which will allow the joystick to adjust the brightness to Darker or return to the setting screen, push the “SET-
you to program several functions such as the Brighter and the contrast to Lower or Higher. For TING” button or “PREV” button.
display screen appearance, programmable fea- information on Map Background, please refer to
tures for your vehicles electronics system and the separate Navigation System Owner’s
other system settings such as your clock. To Manual.
make a selection from this mode use the joystick
and press the “ENTER” button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LHA0259 LHA0260 LHA0261
Vehicle electronic systems
The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen
will appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec-
tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push-
ing the “ENTER” button.
To set the various electronic systems operating
conditions, select the applicable item using the
joystick, and push the “ENTER” button. The
indicator light, box at left of selected item, alter-
nately turns on and off each time the “ENTER”
button is pressed.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle: NOTE: Speed dependent wiper:
With this option ON, the driver’s seat automati- If you change the horn beep or the lamp This key allows you to turn on or turn off the
cally moves back and returns to the original po- flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-
sition for ease of exit and entry. not be changed with the display. Use the tion.
keyfob to return to the previous mode and Return all settings to default:
Remote unlock driver’s door first:
re-enable the display control.
This option allows you to select which doors will When this key is selected and turned on using
Auto re-lock time: the “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE-
unlock first during an unlocking operation:
This key allows you to set the length of time HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the default
Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors settings.
before doors auto re-lock.
Keyless remote response — horn:
Sensitivity of automatic headlights:
This key allows you to change the horn chirp
This key allows you to set the sensitivity of the
mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or
automatic headlights:
UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
● Lower- less sensitive, automatic headlights
NOTE: will take longer to come on when the head-
If you change the horn beep or the lamp light sensor senses less ambient light.
flash feature with the keyfob, the display ● Higher- more sensitive, automatic head-
screen will not show the current mode. Use lights will come on quicker when the head-
the keyfob to return to the previous mode light sensor senses less ambient light.
and re-enable the display screen control.
Automatic headlights off delay:
Keyless remote response — lights:
This key allows you to set the length of time
This key allows you to change the hazard indica- before the automatic headlights turn off after
tor flash mode that occurs when pressing the exiting the vehicle.
LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LHA0262 LHA0270 LHA0271
System settings Clock Setting daylight savings time:
Language/Unit Adjusting the time: Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust
the clock to daylight savings time.
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and push- the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time. ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour.
ing the “ENTER” button. The time will change step by step. OFF: The current time is displayed.
Language: English or French After completion of the setting, press the
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG “PREV” button.
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
You can select the language and unit using the
joystick and “ENTER” button.

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LHA0272 LHA0273 LHA0274
Adjusting the time to the GPS: Selecting the time zone: 2. Select one of the following zones depending
Select the “Auto Adjust” key. 1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key. on the current location.

The time will be reset to the GPS time. The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear. ● Pacific zone
● Mountain zone
● Central zone
● Eastern zone
● Atlantic zone
● Newfoundland zone
After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screen
will appear.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
VENTILATORS

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to


the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone
has been set as the initial (default) setting.
Beep setting
With this option ON, a beep will sound if any
audio button is pushed.
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, push
the button. Pushing the button again will
change the display to DAY or NIGHT display.
Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick
right or left.
LHA0488
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the
“PREV” button is pushed, the display will return
to the previous display.

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual)

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
WHA0510 people or animals.
rear center console ventilators (if so
equipped) ● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas- air to become stale and the windows to
senger side windowss 1 , driver and passenger
fog up.
front s 2 centers
3 , rear passenger compartment
s4 and rear center console (if so equipped) ven- ● Positioning of the heater and/or air
tilatorss5 by moving the ventilator slide and/or conditioner controls should not be
ventilator assemblies. done while driving so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on):


Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
LHA0489 Push the button to the on position when:
1. Fan control dial Air flow control dial ● driving on a dusty road.
2. Temperature control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select the ● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
3. Air flow control dial senger compartment.
air flow outlets.
4. Air conditioner button (if so equipped)
5. Rear window defroster button (if so MAX — Air flows from center and side ● for maximum cooling when using the air con-
equipped) A/C vents with maximum cooling (air ditioner.
6. Air recirculation button (if so equipped) conditioning if so equipped). OFF position (Indicator light off):
— Air flows from center and side Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-
CONTROLS ventilators. ment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Fan control dial — Air flows from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets. Use the off position for normal heater or air con-
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and ditioner operation.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
controls fan speed.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Air conditioner button 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
(if so equipped) position. sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
The button is provided only on vehicles equipped 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
with an air conditioner. tion. ● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and the
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
temperature control lever to the full HOT
desired (1 - 4) position and push the sired position between the middle and the
position.
button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator hot position.
light comes on when the air conditioner is oper- ● When the position is selected, the air
Ventilation conditioner automatically turns on (however,
ating. To turn off the air conditioner, push
the button again. This mode directs outside air to the side and the indicator light will not illuminate) if the
center ventilators. outside temperature is more than 36°F
The air conditioner cooling function oper- (2°C). The air conditioning system will con-
ates only when the engine is running. 1. Push the button to the off position. tinue to operate until the fan control dial is
Rear window defroster switch (if so 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even
position. if the air flow control dial is turned to a
equipped) position other than the position. This
For more information about the rear window de- 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
froster switch, see “Rear window defroster tion. windshield. The mode automatically
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn
of this manual. sired position. into the passenger compartment to further
improve the defogging performance.
HEATER OPERATION Defrosting or defogging
Heating This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
Bi-level heating
defrost/defog the windows. This mode directs cooler air from the side and
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
center vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
When the temperature control dial is moved to
outlets. position.
the full hot or full cool position, the air between
1. Push the button to the off position for 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- the vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-
normal heating. tion. perature.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
1. Push the button (if so equipped) to position other than the position. This 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
the off position. dehumidifies the air which helps defog the tion.
windshield. The mode (if so 4. Push the button. The indicator light
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
equipped) automatically turns off, allowing comes on.
position.
outside air to be drawn into the passenger
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- compartment to further improve the defog- 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
tion. ging performance. sired position.
● For quick cooling when the outside tem-
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- Operating tips perature is high, push the button to
sired position.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades the on position (indicator light on). Be sure
Heating and defogging and air inlet in front of the windshield. This to return the button to the off position
improves heater operation. for normal cooling.
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
shield. AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if Dehumidified heating
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the so equipped) This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
position.
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the 1. Push the button to the off position.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- desired (1 - 4) position, and push in the 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
tion. button to activate the air conditioner. When the position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying
functions are added to the heater operation. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
sired position between the middle and the
tion.
hot position. The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running. 4. Push the button. The indicator light
● When the position is selected, the air
comes on.
conditioner automatically turns on (however, Cooling
the indicator light will not illuminate) if the 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
outside temperature is more than 36°F This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. sired position.
(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-
1. Push the button to the off position.
tinue to operate until the fan control dial is
turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
if the air flow control dial is turned to a position.
4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Dehumidified defogging 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- AIR FLOW CHARTS
sired position.
This mode is used to defog the windows and The following charts show the button and dial
dehumidify the air. Operating tips positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. For additional information
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the ● Keep the windows and sunroof (if so
on heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-
position. equipped) closed while the air conditioner is
ditioner” in this section”. The air recirculation
in operation.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- ( ) button should always be in the OFF
tion. ● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 position for heating and defrosting.
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
3. Push the button. The indicator light air from the passenger compartment. Then,
comes on. close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
When the , or positions in between
are selected, the air conditioner automatically ● The air conditioning system should be
turns on (however, the indicator light will not operated for approximately 10 minutes
illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than at least once a month. This helps pre-
36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system will con- vent damage to the system due to lack
tinue to operate until the fan control dial is turned of lubrication.
to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flow ● If the engine coolant temperature
control dial is turned to a position other than gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
the position. This dehumidifies the air perature over the normal range, turn
which helps defog the windshield. The the air conditioner off. See “If your
mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
to be drawn into the passenger compartment to emergency” section of this manual.
further improve the defogging performance.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LHA0494 LHA0495

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LHA0542 LHA0497

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
LHA0498

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)

● Do not use the recirculation mode for


long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
● Positioning of the heater and/or air
conditioner controls should not be
done while driving so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
LHA0491 Cooling or heating (auto)
1. Driver temperature control dial WARNING This mode may be normally used all year round as
2. Front window defroster button the system automatically works to keep a con-
3. Fan speed control and system OFF dial ● The air conditioner cooling function op-
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan
erates only when the engine is running.
4. AUTO button speed are also controlled automatically.
5. Passenger temperature control dial ● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance 1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be
6. A/C ON/OFF button displayed.)
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
7. Rear control and fan speed dial
should also not be left alone. They 2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control
8. Rear window defroster button could accidentally injure themselves or
9. MODE button dial to the left or right to set the desired
others through inadvertent operation of temperature. Driver and passenger tem-
10. Air recirculation button the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, peratures can be set independently. Press
11. Rear temperature control dial temperatures in a closed vehicle could
AUTO a second time to activate dual climate
quickly become high enough to cause
control functions. Turn the passenger’s side
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
temperature control dial to the left or right to
people or animals.
set the desired passenger’s temperature.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F tion. This dehumidifies the air which helps Air flow control
(24°C) for normal operation. defog the windshield. The air recirculation
mode automatically turns off, allowing out- Pushing the MODE button manually controls air
● The temperature of the passenger compart- side air to be drawn into the passenger flow and selects the air outlet to:
ment will be maintained automatically. Air compartment to further improve the defog- — Air flows from center and side
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off ging performance. ventilators.
are also controlled automatically.
MANUAL OPERATION — Air flows from center and side
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging ventilators and foot outlets.
Fan speed control — Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
1. Push the defroster control button to
turn the system on. The display will show the Turn the fan control dial left or right to — Air flows from defroster and foot
defrost icon. manually control the fan speed. outlets.
Push the AUTO button to return to automatic — Air flows mainly from defroster
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right outlets.
to set the desired temperature. control of the fan speed.
To turn system off
● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the Air recirculation
windows, turn the manual fan control dial to Turn and hold the fan speed control dial all the
The mode automatically turns off, allowing way to the left ( 0 ) until the system turns off.
the maximum position . outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-
● As soon as possible after the windshield is partment to prevent fogging.
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the Push the air recirculation button to recir-
auto mode. culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push the
● When the DEF control is activated, AUTO button to return to automatic mode.
the air conditioner will automatically be The air recirculation button will not be activated
turned on at outside temperatures above when the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, or
36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more than floor/defrost mode.
one minute, the air conditioning system will
continue to operate until the fan control is
turned OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if
the air flow MODE control button is used to
select a position other than the posi-
4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
OPERATING TIPS
● When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.

WHA0509 LIC0835
1. Rear fan speed control dial. The sunload sensor s 1 , located on the top center
of the instrument panel, helps the system main-
2. Rear temperature control dial.
tain a constant temperature. Do not put anything
REAR CONTROL BUTTON on or around this sensor.

You can adjust the climate control system for rear


seat passengers using the buttons on the main
control panel. Front passengers can control the
rear functions by placing the controls on any
setting other than the “R”.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

To operate the rear air conditioner, the engine The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
must be running. hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
The rear seat air conditioner can be turned on
and off from the front controls. If the rear seat fan This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
control dial is set to (0), the air conditioner is ozone layer.
turned off. If it is set to any of the fan speed
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
positions, air is discharged from the rear vents at
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
the corresponding speed. When the rear seat fan
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
control dial is set to (R), the rear seat passengers
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
control their own fan speed.
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-
cal and consumer information” section of this
manual.
LHA0490
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
1. Rear fan speed control dial. mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
2. Rear temperature control dial.
CONTROLS WARNING
The air conditioner system contains re-
Fan control dial frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
The fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on and personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
off, and controls fan speed. vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows rear passen-
gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
AUDIO SYSTEM

RADIO Reception conditions will constantly change be- Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position signal distance and interference from other ve- signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
and press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob hicles can work against ideal reception. De- signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with scribed below are some of the factors that can mentary flutter or loss of sound.
the engine not running, the key should be turned affect your radio reception.
to the ACC position. AM RADIO RECEPTION
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Radio reception is affected by station signal AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 bend around objects and skip along the ground.
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single chan- In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
normally are caused by these external influences. FM. External influences may sometimes interfere these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
with FM station reception even if the FM station is ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM to receiver.
hicle may influence radio reception quality.
signal is directly related to the distance between
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
Radio reception the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
characteristics as light. For example they will
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
reflect off objects.
dio reception. These circuits are designed to areas where no obstacles exist.
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
ity of that reception. a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
and/or drift.
However there are some general characteristics
Static and flutter: During signal interference from SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even buildings, large hills or due to antenna position equipped)
when the finest equipment is used. These char- (usually in conjunction with increased distance When the satellite radio is first installed or the
acteristics are completely normal in a given re- from the station transmitter) static or flutter can battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may
ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait
in your NISSAN radio system. treble control to reduce treble response. more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
the vehicle outside of any metal or large building disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary or packaging.
data.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO player may malfunction due to the hu-
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
selected unless optional satellite receiver and and dehumidify or ventilate the player
antenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™ completely.
satellite radio service subscription is active.
● The player may skip while driving on
Satellite radio performance may be affected if rough roads.
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
● The CD player sometimes cannot func-
signal.
tion when the compartment tempera-
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite ture is extremely high. Decrease the
antenna. temperature before use.
● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
● CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly.
● The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
LHA0099
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS ● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
Compact disc (CD) player ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● Do not use the following CDs as they PUSH EJECT: ● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
may cause the CD player to malfunc- bits per second used by a digital music file.
This is an error due to excessive tem-
tion: The size and quality of a compressed digital
perature inside the player. Remove the
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter CD by pushing the EJECT button. After
when encoding the file.
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
● CDs that are not round
can be played when the temperature of ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
● CDs with a paper label the player returns to normal. is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or UNPLAYABLE:
conversion) per second.
have abnormal edges
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
● ID3 tag — The ID3 tag is the part of the
● This audio system can only play pre- tem (only MP3 CD).
encoded MP3 file that contains information
recorded CDs. It has no capability to about the digital music file such as song title,
record or burn CDs. Compact Disc with MP3
artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the Terms: time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is
following messages will be displayed. ● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the on the display.
CHECK DISC:
most well-known compressed digital audio
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor- file format. This format allows for near “CD
rectly (the label side is facing up, quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
etc.). normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
warped and it is free of scratches. file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“ROOT” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.

WHA0543
Playback order:
Playback order of the CD with compressed files
(MP3) is as illustrated above.
● The names of folders not containing MP3
files are not shown in the display.

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW


ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2,
Supported file systems Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet
writing) is not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Supported versions* MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3
Tag information
(MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (includ-
Folder levels
ing root folder), Files: 512
Text character number limitation 31 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNI-
CODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04:
Displayable character codes UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big
Endian), 05: (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-
UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure


Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is
gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
Cannot play
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to
the normal temperature.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, or “.mp3” cannot be played. In addition, the char-
acter codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in com-
pliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some
It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing. time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed,
Music cuts off or skips writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest
writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3 file has been given an extension of “.MP3” or “.mp3”, or when play is
Moves immediately to the next song when playing prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and
then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in the desired order The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
1. PRESET ABC button
2. Display
3. CD button
4. CD eject button
5. CD insert slot
6. MENU button
7. AUDIO button
8. Station select buttons
9. SEEK/TRACK button
10. PWR/VOL control knob
11. BAND select button
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
PWR/VOL control knob
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,
then push the PWR/VOL control knob. If you
listen to the radio with the engine not running,
turn the key to the ACC position. The mode (radio
or CD) that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off resumes playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pushing the PWR/VOL control knob again turns
the system off.
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.

LHA0117

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
times for BAL (balance). Once the audio level is FM-AM radio operation
set the display will return back to radio or CD
display mode after 7 seconds or the AUDIO FM-AM band select
button can be pressed again within 7 seconds to
set the next audio level. Pressing the AUDIO Push the button to change from AM to FM
button a fifth time will return the display back to reception.
radio or CD display mode. The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during
Fader adjusts the sound level between the front FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
and rear speakers, balance adjusts the sound signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
level between the right and left speakers. from stereo to monaural reception.
SEEK/manual/SCAN
Clock set
tuning
1. Press and hold the MENU button until it
When the button is pushed while the radio
beeps (longer than 2 seconds). is playing, tuning mode is cycled between:
2. The hours will start flashing. Press SEEK tuning → manual tuning → SCAN mode
SEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust the
hours. “TUNE” and “SCAN” are shown in the display for
each mode. No icon is displayed for SEEK mode.
3. Press the MENU button until the radio beeps
to switch to the minute adjustment. WARNING
4. The minutes will start flashing. Press The radio should not be tuned while driv-
LHA0118 SEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust the min- ing so full attention may be given to ve-
Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance utes. hicle operation.

To adjust the audio levels for bass, treble, fader, 5. Press the MENU button again to exit the SEEK tuning
and balance, push the AUDIO button and adjust clock set mode.
Push the SEEK/TRACK tuning button (
the level with the SEEK/TRACK button. Press the The display will return to the regular clock display or ) for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning
AUDIO button once for BASS (bass), twice for after 7 seconds, or you may press the MENU begins from low to high frequencies or high to
TREB (treble), 3 times for FAD (fader) and 4 button again to return to the regular clock display. low frequencies, depending on which button is
4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta- Press the PRESET ABC button to change be-
tion. If using the button, once the highest tween the presets:
broadcasting station is reached, the radio contin-
A→B→C
ues in the SEEK mode at the lowest broadcasting
station. If using the button, once the lowest The radio displays icon A, B or C to indicate
broadcasting station is reached, the radio contin- which set of presets is active.
ues in the SEEK mode at the highest broadcast-
ing station. To store a radio station in a preset:

Manual tuning 1. Select the desired preset by pressing PRE-


SET ABC.
Use the and buttons for manual
tuning. To move quickly through the channels, 2. Tune to the desired station.
hold either of the tuning buttons down. 3. Press the desired station select button for
SCAN tuning more than 3 seconds. For example, in the
illustrations, ch2 is to be memorized. The
Push and hold the SEEK/TRACK tuning button radio mutes when the select button is
( or ) for more than 1.5 seconds. pushed.
SCAN illuminates in the display window, and the 4. When the indicator illuminates in the display
radio station blinks. SCAN tuning begins from and the sound resumes, memorizing is com-
low to high frequencies or high to low frequen- plete.
cies, depending on which button is pressed.
SCAN tuning stops at each broadcasting station 5. Other station select buttons can be set in
for 5 seconds. When scanning, SCAN is solid the same manner.
LHA0119
and the radio station blinks. When temporarily If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radio
stopped on a station, SCAN blinks and the sta- Station memory operations fuse opens, the radio memory is canceled. In that
tion display is solid. Pushing the button again case, reset the desired stations.
Each preset mode (A, B or C) has 6 presets,
during this 5 second period stops SCAN tuning
capable of storing any combination of AM and FM
and the radio remains tuned to that station.
stations.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Compact disc (CD) player operation (When the last selection on the compact disc is same program may be repeated twice. If the
skipped, the first selection is played.) button is pushed in the MIX mode, selections will
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position, be chosen at random.
and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot When the button is pushed and released, the
with the label side up. The compact disc is auto- selection being played returns to the beginning. Blank (no symbol): All selections are played
matically pulled into the slot and starts to play. Push the button several times to skip back repeatedly in sequence.
several selections. Each time the button is When a new compact disc is inserted, the
If the radio is already operating, it automatically pushed, the CD moves back 1 selection.
turns off and the compact disc begins to play. play pattern automatically changes to ALL.
If the play pattern is in MIX mode when the CD EJECT button
CAUTION or button is pushed the next selection will be
chosen at random. When the button is pushed with a com-
Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD FF (Fast Forward)/REV (Reverse) pact disc loaded, the compact disc ejects.
and/or CD changer/player. When the button is pushed while the com-
When the or button is pushed and held
CD button pact disc is playing, the compact disc ejects and
while the compact disc is playing, the compact
the system turns off.
disc plays at an increased speed while fast for-
When the CD button is pushed with a compact warding or rewinding. When the button is re- DISC indicator light
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns leased, the compact disc returns to normal play
off and the compact disc starts to play. speed. This light comes on when a compact disc
Track up/down, FF/REV is loaded into the player.
MENU
(rewind) buttons
Track up/down When the button is pushed while the com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern changes as
When the button is pushed and released follows:
while the compact disc is playing, the selection
following the present one starts to play from the RPT: The current selection is repeated.
beginning. Push the button several times to
skip several selections. Each time the button is MIX: Selections are played at random, not fol-
pushed, the CD advances 1 additional selection. lowing the sequence on the compact disc. The
The number appears in the display window.
4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
13. PWR/VOL control knob
14. Station preset buttons
15. TUNE button

*No satellite radio reception is available


when the RADIO button is pressed to
access satellite radio stations unless
optional satellite receiver and antenna
are installed (retrofit unavailable without
factory satellite radio pre-wiring), and
an XMT or SIRIUS™ satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active.
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER
Audio main operation
POWER/VOLUME control:
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then
push the POWER/VOLUME control knob while
the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)
LHA0492 which was playing immediately before the system
1. PRESET ABC button 7. SCAN RPT was turned off.
2. Display screen 8. DISP button
To turn the system off, press the
3. CLOCK button 9. CAT FOLDER POWER/VOLUME control knob.
4. SEEK/TRACK button 10. CD Load button
5. CD or CD REAR AV (if so equipped) 11. CD insert slot Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad-
6. RADIO button 12. CD eject button just the volume.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-35

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
This vehicle may be equipped with speed sensi- Clock set To change the default display mode push the
tive control volume (SSV) for audio. The audio tune knob to display mode and rotate the knob to
1. Press the CLOCK button until it beeps
volume changes as the driving speed changes. select the following display mode: Disc title ←→
(>1.5 seconds).
Track title ←→ Track number.
AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,
2. The hours will start flashing. Press CAT
FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped): Once the display mode is selected press the tune
FOLDER ( or ) or SEEK TRACK
knob to store your selection. If the tuning knob is
Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as ( or ) to adjust the hours.
not pressed after 8 seconds the display will re-
follows:
3. Press the CLOCK button again to switch to fresh with the last selected display mode setting.
BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE the minute adjustment.
● Track title mode displays the title of the se-
→ SSV (if so equipped)
4. Press CAT FOLDER ( or ) or lected CD track.
To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade and SEEK-TRACK ( or ) to adjust
● Disk title mode displays the title of the CD
Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired the minutes.
being played.
mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning
5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the
knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired ● Track number mode displays the number
clock set mode.
level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust selected disc and the track that is currently
Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the The display will return to the regular clock display being played on the disk.
sound level between the front and rear speakers after 7 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK
MP3 display mode
and Balance adjusts the sound between the right button again to return to the regular clock display.
and left speakers. To change the text displayed when listening to an
DISP (display) button:
MP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is being
To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or
This DISP (display) button will show text about used), press the DISP button. The DISP button
HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.
MP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display. will scroll through the CD text as follows: Disc
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the title ←→ Track title ←→ Folder title.
CD display mode
desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly
To change the default display mode push the
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- To change the text displayed while playing a CD
tune knob to display mode and rotate the knob to
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
select the following display mode: Folder number
reappear after about 10 seconds. will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:
←→ Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Disc title
Disc title ←→ Track title.
←→ Disc number.

4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Once a display mode is selected press the tune tuning knob is not pressed after 8 seconds the No satellite radio reception is available when the
knob again to store the setting. display will refresh with the last selected display RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio
mode setting. stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-
● Folder number mode displays the folder
tenna are installed (retrofit unavailable without
number and the file number of the folder ● Channel number mode displays the channel
factory satellite radio pre-wiring), and an XMT or
currently being played. number of the selected satellite radio sta-
SIRIUS™ satellite radio service subscription is
tion.
● Disc number mode displays the number se- active. If satellite radio is not operational then the
lected disc and the track that is currently ● Channel name mode displays the channel RADIO button is used to toggle between AM and
being played. name of the selected satellite radio station. FM bands.
● Track title mode displays the ID3 track title of ● Name mode displays the name of the artist, If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
the MP3 file. host or weather condition of the selected button is pushed, the compact disc will automati-
● Disc title mode displays the ID3 disc title of satellite radio station. cally be turned off and the last radio station
the MP3 file. played will come on.
● Title mode displays the song title, show
● Folder title mode displays the folder name name, or temperature of the selected satel- The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM
given to the MP3 folder. lite radio station. stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
Display satellite radio display mode (if so FM/AM/SAT radio operation from stereo to monaural reception.
equipped)
FM/AM/SAT band select: CAT FOLDER (Tuning):
To change the text displayed when listening to
satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP Pushing the RADIO button will change the band
button. The DISP button will scroll through the as follows: WARNING
broadcasted information as follows: Name ←→ The radio should not be tuned while driv-
AM ←→ FM1 or SAT (Satellite, if so equipped)
Title ←→ Current display mode. ing so full attention may be given to ve-
When the RADIO button is pushed while the hicle operation.
To change the default display mode push the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
tune knob to display mode and rotate the knob to To manually tune the radio, push the CAT
radio will come on at the station last played.
select the following display modes: Channel FOLDER tune button ( or ) or turn
number ←→ Channel name ←→ Name ←→ The last station played will also come on when
the tuning knob to right or left.
Title. Once the display mode is selected press the POWER/VOLUME control knob is de-
the tune knob again to store the setting. If the pressed to ON.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
To move quickly through the channels, hold either 1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using the If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
the or button down for more than preset select button. RDS icon is displayed.
1.5 seconds.
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station Compact disc (CD) changer operation
SEEK tuning: band.
3. Tune to the desired station using manual, CAUTION
Push the SEEK/TRACK button ( or ) SEEK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any of
for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low ● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) insert slot. This could damage the CD
or low to high frequencies and stop at the next until a beep sound is heard.
broadcasting station. and/or CD changer/player.
4. The channel indicator will then come on and ● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
To seek quickly through the channels, press and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
hold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5 closed could damage the CD and/or CD
complete. changer.
seconds. When the button is released the radio
will seek to the next broadcasting station. 5. Other buttons can be set in the same man- Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
ner. and insert the compact disc into the slot with the
SCAN RPT tuning:
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse label side facing up. The compact disc will be
Push the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5 blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In that guided automatically into the slot and start play-
seconds to stop at each broadcasting station case, reset the desired stations. ing. To insert the disc, first push the LOAD button.
(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.
Pushing the button again during this 5 second Radio data system (RDS): If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPT
information service transmitted by some radio If the system has been turned off while the com-
button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur- pact disc was playing, pushing the
tuning moves to the next station.
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but POWER/VOLUME control knob will start the
PRESET A-B-C (Station memory opera- many stations are now considering broadcasting compact disc.
tions): RDS data.
LOAD button:
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT RDS can display:
(Satellite-if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the load
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select
SAT stations. ● Station name, such as “The Groove”.
4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select the button is pushed. (When the last track on the 1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-
button (1 – 6), then insert the CD. compact disc is skipped through, the first track rently playing will be played randomly
will be played.) REAR AV (if so equipped):
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the load
button for more than 1.5 seconds. When the or button is pushed for Press the Rear AV button to toggle the radio
more than 1.5 seconds while a CD is playing, the between CD and DVD modes. When the radio
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the
CD plays at an increased speed while fast for- goes into DVD mode and the DVD player is off
display when CDs are loaded into the changer.
warding or rewinding through the existing track the DVD player will turn on. When the DVD player
CD button: being played. When the button is released the is on radio or CD can be selected. The DVD
CD returns to normal play speed. player will remain on and broadcast audio
When the CD button is pushed with the system
through the headphones in the rear of the vehicle.
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will CD select buttons:
The DVD player can be turned off from the radio
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
To play another CD that has been loaded, push a by selecting the DVD mode and pushing the
When the CD button is pushed with the compact CD select button (1 – 6). radio power button. The DVD player will turn off
disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio will and the radio will go to the last selected mode.
SCAN/RPT:
automatically be turned off and the compact disc The DVD player can be operated by remote con-
will start to play. When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushed trol or by the DVD entertainment system located
while the compact disc is played, the play pattern in the center console.
SEEK/TRACK:
can be changed as follows:
When the button is pushed for less than 1.5 CD EJECT:
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT
seconds while a compact disc is playing, the
→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC Current disc:
track being played returns to its beginning. Push
RPT
several times to skip back through tracks. The ● Press the slot number (1 – 6) for the desired
compact disc will go back the number of times ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated. disc, then press the button. The com-
the button is pushed. 1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not
be repeated. removed within 15 seconds, the disc will
When the button is pushed for less than 1.5
1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing reload (except 3.1 in [8 cm] diameter com-
seconds while the compact disc is playing, the pact discs).
will be repeated
next track will start to play from its beginning.
ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be
Push several times to skip through tracks. The
compact disc will advance the number of times played randomly

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-39

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
All discs:
● Press and hold the button for more
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
within 15 seconds, or the button is
pressed again during the eject sequence,
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
celed.
When this button is pushed while the compact
disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
and the last source will be played.
CD IN indicator:
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
have been loaded into the changer.

LHA0493
1. SEEK/TRACK change button 7. Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6)
2. CAT FOLDER 8. CD button
3. SCAN button 9. RADIO button
4. PAUSE/MUTE button 10. REAR AV button
5. POWER/VOLUME control knob 11. RPT button
6. PRESET A-B-C select button 12. DISP button
4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
13. Tuning and AUDIO control knob Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad- Clock set
(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE and BAL- just the volume.
For setting the clock see “Adjusting the time” on
ANCE) This vehicle has speed sensitive control volume page 4-10.
14. CD load button (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes as
15. CD insert slot DISP (display) button:
the driving speed changes.
16. CD eject button This DISP (display) button will show text about
AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE, MP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display.
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):
COMPACT DISC CHANGER (if so Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as
CD display mode
equipped) follows: To change the text displayed while playing a CD
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:
SAT” is displayed when the RADIO button is → SSV (if so equipped) Disc title ←→ Track title.
pressed to access satellite radio stations unless
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade and To change the default display mode push the
stalled (retrofit unavailable without factory satel- Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired tune knob to display mode and rotate the knob to
lite radio pre-wiring), and an XMT or SIRIUS™ mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning select the following display mode: Disc title ←→
satellite radio service subscription is active. knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired Track title ←→ Track number.
level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust
Once the display mode is selected press the tune
Audio main operation Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the
knob to store your selection. If the tuning knob is
sound level between the front and rear speakers
POWER/VOLUME control: not pressed after 8 seconds the display will re-
and Balance adjusts the sound between the right
fresh with the last selected display mode setting.
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then and left speakers.
push the POWER/VOLUME control knob while ● Track title mode displays the title of the se-
To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or
the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) lected CD track.
HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.
which was playing immediately before the system ● Disk title mode displays the title of the CD
was turned off. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
being played.
desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly
To turn the system off, press the until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- ● Track number mode displays the number
POWER/VOLUME control knob. wise, the radio or CD display will automatically selected disc and the track that is currently
reappear after about 10 seconds. being played on the disk.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-41

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
MP3 display mode Display satellite radio display mode (if so Pause/mute button:
equipped)
To change the text displayed when listening to an To mute or pause the audio sound, push the
MP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is being To change the text displayed when listening to PAUSE/MUTE button. Radio mute will flash in the
used), press the DISP button. The DISP button satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP display screen.
will scroll through the CD text as follows: Disc button. The DISP button will scroll through the
To release the mute or pause, push the button
title ←→ Track title ←→ Folder title. broadcasted information as follows: Name ←→
again.
Title ←→ Current display mode.
To change the default display mode push the
tune knob to display mode and rotate the knob to To change the default display mode push the FM/AM/SAT radio operation
select the following display mode: Folder number tune knob to display mode and rotate the knob to FM/AM/SAT band select:
←→ Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Disc title select the following display modes: Channel
←→ Disc number. number ←→ Channel name ←→ Name ←→ Pushing the RADIO button will change the band
Title. Once the display mode is selected press as follows:
Once a display mode is selected press the tune
the tune knob again to store the setting. If the AM ←→ FM1 or SAT (Satellite, if so equipped)
knob again to store the setting.
tuning knob is not pressed after 8 seconds the
● Folder number mode displays the folder display will refresh with the last selected display When the RADIO button is pushed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
number and the file number of the folder mode setting.
radio will come on at the station last played.
currently being played.
● Channel number mode displays the channel
The last station played will also come on when
● Disc number mode displays the number se- number of the selected satellite radio sta- the POWER/VOLUME control knob is de-
lected disc and the track that is currently tion. pressed to ON.
being played.
● Channel name mode displays the channel No satellite radio reception is available when the
● Track title mode displays the ID3 track title of name of the selected satellite radio station. RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio
the MP3 file. stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-
● Name mode displays the name of the artist,
● Disc title mode displays the ID3 disc title of host or weather condition of the selected tenna are installed (retrofit unavailable without
the MP3 file. satellite radio station. factory satellite radio pre-wiring), and an XMT or
SIRIUS™ satellite radio service subscription is
● Folder title mode displays the folder name ● Title mode displays the song title, show active. If satellite radio is not operational then the
given to the MP3 folder. name, or temperature of the selected satel- RADIO button is used to toggle between AM and
lite radio station. FM bands.
4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO To seek quickly through the channels, press and 4. The channel indicator will then come on and
button is pushed, the compact disc will automati- hold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5 the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
cally be turned off and the last radio station seconds. When the button is released the radio complete.
played will come on. will seek to the next broadcasting station.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM SCAN tuning ner.
stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
Push the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
display window. SCAN tuning begins from low to blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
from stereo to monaural reception.
high frequencies. SCAN tuning stops for 5 sec- case, reset the desired stations.
CAT FOLDER (Tuning): onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-
Radio data system (RDS):
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
WARNING blinks in the display. Pushing the SCAN button RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
The radio should not be tuned while driv- again during this 5 second period stops SCAN information service transmitted by some radio
ing so full attention may be given to ve- tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station. stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
hicle operation. rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
PRESET A-B-C (Station memory opera-
many stations are now considering broadcasting
tions):
To manually tune the radio, push the CAT RDS data.
FOLDER tune button ( or ) or turn 18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
(Satellite-if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C RDS can display:
the tuning knob to right or left.
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or ● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
To move quickly through the channels, hold either SAT stations.
the or button down for more than ● Station name, such as “The Groove”.
1.5 seconds. 1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using the
preset select button. If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
SEEK tuning: RDS icon is displayed.
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station
Push the SEEK/TRACK button ( or ) band.
for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low 3. Tune to the desired station using manual,
or low to high frequencies and stop at the next SEEK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any of
broadcasting station. the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)
until a beep sound is heard.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-43

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
Compact disc (CD) changer operation To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the When the or button is pushed for
LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. more than 1.5 seconds while a CD is playing, the
CAUTION CD plays at an increased speed while fast for-
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the
warding or rewinding through the existing track
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD display when CDs are loaded into the changer.
being played. When the button is released the
insert slot. This could damage the CD CD button: CD returns to normal play speed.
and/or CD changer/player.
When the CD button is pushed with the system CD select buttons:
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
closed could damage the CD and/or CD turn on and the compact disc will start to play. To play another CD that has been loaded, push a
changer. CD select button (1 – 6).
When the CD button is pushed with the compact
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio will RPT:
and insert the compact disc into the slot with the automatically be turned off and the compact disc When the RPT play button is pushed while the
label side facing up. The compact disc will be will start to play.
compact disc is played, the play pattern can be
guided automatically into the slot and start play-
SEEK/TRACK: changed as follows:
ing. To insert the disc, first push the LOAD button.
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT
If the radio is already operating, it will automati- When the button is pushed for less than 1.5
→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC
cally turn off and the compact disc will play. seconds while a compact disc is playing, the
RPT
track being played returns to its beginning. Push
If the system has been turned off while the com-
several times to skip back through tracks. The ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.
pact disc was playing, pushing the compact disc will go back the number of times 1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will
POWER/VOLUME control knob will start the the button is pushed. be repeated.
compact disc.
When the button is pushed for less than 1.5 1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing
LOAD button: seconds while the compact disc is playing, the will be repeated
next track will start to play from its beginning. ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be
To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOAD
Push several times to skip through tracks. The played randomly
button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the
compact disc will advance the number of times 1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-
loading slot by pushing the CD insert select
the button is pushed. (When the last track on the rently playing will be played randomly
button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.
compact disc is skipped through, the first track
will be played.)
4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/30/05—cathy X
REAR AV (if so equipped): All discs:
Press the Rear AV button to toggle the radio ● Press and hold the button for more
between CD and DVD modes. When the radio than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
goes into DVD mode and the DVD player is off ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
the DVD player will turn on. When the DVD player within 15 seconds, or the button is
is on radio or CD can be selected. The DVD pressed again during the eject sequence,
player will remain on and broadcast audio the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
through the headphones in the rear of the vehicle. celed.
The DVD player can be turned off from the radio
When this button is pushed while the compact
by selecting the DVD mode and pushing the
disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
radio power button. The DVD player will turn off
and the last source will be played.
and the radio will go to the last selected mode.
CD IN indicator:
The DVD player can be operated by remote con-
trol or by the DVD entertainment system located The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs LHA0049
in the center console. have been loaded into the changer.
CD CARE AND CLEANING
CD EJECT:
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
Current disc: disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Press the slot number (1 – 6) for the desired ● Always place the discs in the storage case
disc, then press the button. The com- when they are not being used.
pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not ● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center
removed within 15 seconds, the disc will to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do
reload (except 3.1 in [8 cm] diameter com- not wipe the disc using a circular motion.
pact discs).
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-45

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
MODE select switch ANTENNA
Push the mode select switch to change the mode Window antenna
in the following sequence: PRESET A, PRESET The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
B or PRESET C radio stations, CD and DVD (if so passenger and driver side windows.
equipped).
CAUTION
Volume control switch
● Do not place metalized film near the
Push the volume control switch up or down to rear driver or passenger side window
increase or decrease the volume. glass or attach any metal parts to it. This
may cause poor reception or noise.
Tuning
● When cleaning the inside of the rear
l1;6Seek tuning (radio): driver or passenger side window, be
LHA0269 Push the tuning switch ( or ) for careful not to scratch or damage the
more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ- window antenna. Lightly wipe along the
1. Volume control switch antenna with a dampened soft cloth.
2. MODE select switch ous radio station.
3. POWER on/off switch Track up or down:
4. Tuning switch
Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped) present program or skip to the next program.
Push several times to skip back or skip through
The audio system can be operated using the
programs.
controls on the steering wheel.
When playing a CD in the CD changer (if so
POWER on/off switch equipped), push the tuning switch (
With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON or ) for more than 1.5 seconds to change
position, push the POWER switch to turn the between discs when multiple CDs are loaded.
audio system on or off. Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds
to skip the CD tracks.
4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)

CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning
the Mobile Entertainment System com-
ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-
ing solutions.
LHA0389 ● Do not attempt to use the system in
extreme temperature conditions [below
WARNING -4°F (-20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].
● The Mobile Entertainment System is ● To avoid draining the vehicle battery, do
designed for rear seat passenger view- not operate the system more than 15
ing only. minutes without starting the engine.
● The driver must not attempt to operate
the Mobile Entertainment System while
the vehicle is in motion so that full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-47

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
LHA0316
1. EJECT button DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYER
2. DVD slot CONTROLS
3. ENTER button
Refer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” later
4. POWER on/off button
in this section for the function of each button.
5. MODE button
6. Input jacks
7. STOP button
8. PLAY/PAUSE button LHA0317
9. MENU button 1. POWER button
10. DISPLAY button 2. STOP button
11. NAVIGATION keys 3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-
OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button
4. TITLE button
5. ENTER button
4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
6. DISPLAY button ● The screen rotates down to view and up
7. MODE button into the housing to store when not in
8. SUBTITLE button use. Ensure that the screen is latched
9. AUDIO button securely into the housing when stored.
10. ANGLE button
11. CLEAR button
12. PAUSE button
13. PLAY button
14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE
button
15. MENU button
16. NAVIGATION keys
17. BACK button
LHA0315
18. NUMERIC KEYPAD
REMOTE CONTROL FLIP-DOWN SCREEN
Refer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” later The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-
in this section for the function of each button. trol receiver s
1 located at the bottom of the
screen.

CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-49

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC
(DVD)
CAUTION
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD
for extended periods of time with the
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle
battery.
● Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-
uids may cause the system to
malfunction.
SAA0720 SAA0721
● The driver must not attempt to wear the
Headphones NOTE:
headphones while the vehicle is in mo-
Power ON/OFF: For optimum infrared headphone perfor- tion so that full attention may be given
mance, increase the volume on the rear to vehicle operation.
Push the power button to turn the headphones seat controller to the maximum level and
● While playing video CD media, this DVD
on or off. adjust the infrared headphone volume us-
player does not guarantee complete
ing the volume control on the headphones.
Volume control: functionality of all video CD formats.
Using a lower volume setting on the rear
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol- seat controller can cause static noise in the With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,
ume. infrared headphones. video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-
gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-
The headphones will automatically be turned off
pendently of the front seat.
in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that
period. To prevent the battery from being dis- Press the REAR AV button located on the front
charged, keep the power suppy turned off when controls for more than 1.5 seconds to hear the
not in use. sound of the DVD player through the speakers.

4-50 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
Pushing the button on the front controls on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input, NEXT CHAPTER/
turns the rear speakers on and off. White = left channel audio input, and Yellow = PREVIOUS CHAPTER
Video input). (Remote control only):
It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote
control. The display will show the “AUX” in the upper left When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button is
corner of the display for 4 seconds once the pushed while the DVD is being played, the pro-
Headphones are a wireless type and no cables
Mode is changed to AUX. gram next to the present one will start to play from
are necessary. You can use them in almost all the
its beginning. Push several times to skip through
ranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to use To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary input
programs. The DVD will advance the number of
the headphones in the front seat.) jacks” in this section.
times the button is pushed. When
POWER on/off button: or PLAY: the (PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is
pushed, the program being played returns to its
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ON
When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player or beginning. Push several times to skip back
position, push the POWER button to turn the
the PLAY button on the remote control is pushed, through programs. The DVD will go back the
DVD player on or off.
the player will play. number of times the button is pushed.
Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side
In play mode, the display will briefly show or PAUSE:
facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically
into the slot. on the upper left corner of the display.
When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player or
If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, the FF (Fast Forward), REW
the PAUSE button on the remote control is
DVD player will automatically turn on. (Remote control only):
pushed, the player will pause playing of the me-
Push FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but- dia. In pause mode, the player will show on
CAUTION tons to carry out the fast forward or fast reverse the upper left corner of the display until the player
Do not force the compact disc into the presentation at 5 times normal play speed. is changed to another mode.
slot. This could damage the player. Push FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but- STOP:
MODE select button: tons again or PLAY button to resume the normal
play speed. Push the STOP button once to stop playing the
Push the Mode button to select Audio/Video media. The display will show in the upper
source between DVD and AUX input (input jacks left corner of the display for 4 seconds, and the
last disc position will be stored. When the PLAY

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-51

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
button is pushed again, it will resume at the ● Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate within forward, and the display will show ,
stored disc track and time position. the display menu, and use ENTER to select and a forward arrow symbol respectively in the
the item. upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds.
If the STOP button is pushed again when the
(Faceplate feature only)
player is already in Stop mode, it will reinitialize ● Holding the DISPLAY control on the face-
the pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect it plate for longer than approximately 2 sec- If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-
will ignore the last stored disc position and upon onds while in the display menu will reset the GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,
receipt of the next play message it will begin at display characteristics to their nominal val- Down, Left, and Right within the menu.
the Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the disc”. ues. (Faceplate feature only)
If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATION
EJECT: If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate is KEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,
pushed for more than 2 seconds, the media and Right within the menu.
When the EJECT button is pushed with the DVD
track/time information will be displayed along the
loaded, it will be ejected. ENTER:
bottom of the display. Pushing the DISPLAY con-
The display will show the EJECT symbol in trol for more than 2 seconds will remove the In MENU mode, push the ENTER button to select
the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds media track/time information from the display. MENU items.
once the EJECT button is pushed. (Faceplate feature only)
In the display menu, push the ENTER button to
If the DVD is not loaded, the display will show NAVIGATION KEYS: select items for modification, as per the on-
“NO DISC”. screen instructions.
If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the NAVI-
If the DVD comes out and is not removed within GATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and Right) will MENU:
25 seconds, it will be pulled back into the slot to perform the following functions: next
protect it. chapter/track, previous chapter/track, fast re- If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU
verse and fast forward, and the display will button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear on
DISPLAY: the screen. Use Navigation Keys to navigate
show , , and respec-
If the DISPLAY control is pushed for less than 2 tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4 within the menu, and use ENTER to select the
seconds, the display menu will appear on the seconds. (Faceplate feature only) item.
screen.
If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of the Push the MENU button again to return to PLAY
● The display menu will remain on the screen NAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down and Right) will mode.
for 10 seconds if no subsequent control perform the following functions: next
activations occur. chapter/track, previous chapter/track and slow
4-52 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
TITLE (Remote control only): CLEAR (Remote control only): Auxiliary input jacks
Push TITLE button to return the DVD media to the Push the CLEAR button to clear all numeric in- The auxiliary input jacks are located on the control
“title” of the DVD. puts, if actuated prior to expiration of the panel. Compatible devices such as video games
3-second timer. camcorders and portable video players can be
Push TITLE button again to return to the previous
stop point and play. NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10) (Remote connected to the auxiliary jacks.
control only): The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-
BACK (Remote control only):
Push the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access tion purposes.
Push the BACK button to exit the current active
disc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting their ● Yellow - video input
menu and return to the previous menu.
numeric value.
SUBTITLE (Remote control only): ● White - left channel audio input
The “≥10” button input numbers greater than or
Push the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle equal to 10, allowing up three digits to be input ● Red - right channel audio input
selection menu. for selecting chapter/title/track number. CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the
through each available subtitle. continuously shift the previously input number to surfaces of your NISSAN mobile entertainment
the “left”. system. (DVD player face, screen, remote con-
AUDIO (Remote control only):
trol, etc.)
The chapter/title/track number will be automati-
Push the AUDIO button to call up audio menu.
cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if
CAUTION
Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle 3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.
through each available audio track. ● Do not use any solvents or cleaning
The operator can cancel the input solutions when cleaning the video
ANGLE (Remote control only): chapter/title/track number by actuating the system.
CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the
Push the ANGLE button to call up camera angle ● Do not use excessive force on the moni-
3-second timer.
menu. tor screen.
These functions can be used only for the DVD
Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle ● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-
discs which correspond to them.
through each available angle. tor screen as it may become dirty or
damaged.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-53

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
● Do not attempt to use the system in ● A new disc may be rough on its inner
extreme temperature conditions [below and outer edges. Remove the rough
-4°F (-20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)]. edges using the side of a pen or pencil
as illustrated.
● Do not attempt to operate the system in
extreme humidity conditions (less than ● Never attempt to use a DVD that has
10% or more than 75%). been cracked, deformed, or repaired
using adhesive. Doing so may cause
damage to the equipment.
● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-
nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not
be read properly.
● Do not write, draw or attach anything on any
LHA0049 side of the DVD.
HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD ● Do not store the DVD in locations with direct
sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.
CAUTION ● Always place discs in the storage case when
● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch they are not being used.
the surface of the disc. ● Do not put on any sticker or write anything
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from on either surface of the DVD.
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
● Do not use a conventional record
cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-
tended for industrial use.

4-54 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
● DVD’s with a region code other than
“1”. The region codes
A is displayed in a
small symbol printed on the top of the
DVD s B

● DVD’s that are not round


● DVD’s with a paper label
● DVD’s that are warped, scratched, or
have unequal edges
● Recordable digital video discs (DVD-R)
● Rewritable digital video discs (DVD-RW)
If a DVD with a paper label is used and
becomes jammed you may be able to reset LHA0318
the unit and eject the jammed disc with the
following procedure:
Remote control and headphones
battery replacement
1. Record the radio presets
Replace the battery as follows:
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from
the battery for five minutes 1. Open the lid.
3. Reconnect the negative battery terminal 2. Replace batteries with new ones.
LHA0484 4. Check to see if the jammed DVD has ● Size AA (remote control)
DVD player operation precautions been ejected. If it has not, try to eject
the DVD by pushing the eject button. ● Size AAA (headphones)
Do not use the following DVD’s as they may Make sure that the and ends on
5. If the disc cannot be ejected see your
cause the DVD player to malfunction: Nissan dealer for further assistance the batteries match the markings inside the
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter compartment.
6. Re-program the radio presets
3. Close the lid securely.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-55

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

● When changing batteries, do not let dust or When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
oil get on the remote control and head- your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
phones. cautions, otherwise the new equipment may ad-
FCC Notice: versely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the manufacturer compliance WARNING
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. This device complies with ● A cellular telephone should not be used
Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of while driving so full attention may be
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to given to vehicle operation. Some juris-
the following two conditions: (1) This de- dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-
vice may not cause harmful interference, phones while driving.
and (2) this device must accept any inter- ● If you must make a call while your ve-
SAA0723 ference received, including interference hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
If the battery is removed for any reason that may cause undesired operation of the lar phone operational mode (if so
device. equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
other than replacement close the lid se-
curely. ercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
● If you will not be using the remote control for operation.
long periods of time, remove the batteries.
● If a conversation in a moving vehicle
● Replacement of the batteries is needed requires you to take notes, pull off the
when the remote control only functions at road to a safe location and stop your
extremely close distances to the DVD player vehicle before doing so.
or not at all.
CAUTION
● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
● An improperly disposed battery can harm sible from the electronic control
the environment. Always confirm local regu- modules.
lations for battery disposal.
4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so, will bypass the variable voltage con-
trol system and the vehicle battery may
not charge completely. Refer to “Vari-
able voltage control system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion later in this manual.
● Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-57

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
MEMO

4-58 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16


Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Low tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
On-pavement and off-road driving precau- Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Hill descent control (HDC) system (if so equipped). . . 5-30
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Hill start assist (HSA) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-31
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING

WARNING ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are ● The exhaust system and body should be
entering the vehicle, drive with all win- inspected by a qualified mechanic
● Do not leave children or adults who dows fully open, and have the vehicle whenever:
would normally require the assistance inspected immediately.
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets a. The vehicle is raised for service.
should also not be left alone. They ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
could accidentally injure themselves or such as a garage.
entering into the passenger
others through inadvertent operation of ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine compartment.
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, running for any extended length of time.
temperatures in a closed vehicle could c. You notice a change in the sound of
quickly become high enough to cause ● Keep the back door and rear windows the exhaust system.
severe or possibly fatal injuries to closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
d. You have had an accident involving
people or animals. gases could be drawn into the passen-
damage to the exhaust system, un-
ger compartment. If you must drive with
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
the back door or rear windows open,
straps to help prevent it from sliding or follow these precautions:
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than THREE-WAY CATALYST
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- 1. Open all the windows.
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
lision, unsecured cargo could cause 2. Set the air recirculation but- device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
personal injury. ton (if so equipped) to off and the fan gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
control dial to 4 (high) to circulate high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) the air.
● If electrical wiring or other cable con- WARNING
WARNING
nections must pass to a trailer through ● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they the seal on the back door or the body, tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
contain colorless and odorless carbon follow the manufacturer’s recommen- or flammable materials away from the
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- exhaust system components.
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or try into the vehicle.
death.

5-2 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING Frequently check the tire pressure information
flammable materials such as dry grass, SYSTEM display on the display screen (if so equipped) and
waste paper or rags. They may ignite adjust pressure of each tire properly. (The order
This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres- of the tire pressure figures displayed on the
and cause a fire.
sure warning system. It monitors tire pressure of screen does not correspond with the actual order
all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure of the tire position.) See “Tire pressure informa-
CAUTION monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more tion” in the “Display screen, heater, air condi-
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If
tioner and audio systems” section for tire pres-
from leaded gasoline will seriously re- equipped, the system also displays pressure of
sure monitor. If you select the tire pressure
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to all tires (except the spare tire) on the display
screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is information in the display (if so equipped), the
help reduce exhaust pollutants. FLAT TIRE warning message will be displayed.
installed in each wheel.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or The low tire pressure warning system will activate Low tire pressure warning
electrical systems can cause overrich only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, this system may not
(lower than 28 psi, 193 kPa), the low tire pres-
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for ex-
ample a flat tire while driving). sure warning light comes on and the chime
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
sounds for about 10 seconds.
able loss of performance or other un- Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
usual operating conditions are heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the For additional information regarding the above
detected. Have the vehicle inspected outside temperature. Low outside temperature warning, see “Warning/indicator lights and au-
promptly by a NISSAN dealer. can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire dible reminders” in the “Instruments and con-
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. trols” section.
level. Running out of fuel could cause This may cause the low tire pressure warning
the engine to misfire, damaging the light to illuminate.
three-way catalyst. If the warning light illuminates in low ambient
● Do not race the engine while warming it temperature as described above, check the tire
up. pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure
to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn
the engine.
the low tire pressure warning light OFF.
Starting and driving 5-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
WARNING CAUTION ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
● If the low tire pressure warning light Do not place metalized film or any metal
flashes while driving, avoid sudden parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, may cause poor reception of the signals rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road from the tire pressure sensors, and the
They have higher ground clearance than passen-
to a safe location and stop the vehicle low tire pressure warning system will not
ger cars to make them capable of performing in a
as soon as possible. Serious vehicle function properly.
variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.
damage could occur and may lead to an
FCC Notice: This gives them a higher center of gravity than
accident and could result in serious
ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground
personal injury. Check the tire pressure Changes or modifications not expressly ap- clearance is a better view of the road, allowing
for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure proved by the manufacturer compliance you to anticipate problems. However, they are not
to the recommended COLD tire pres- could void the user’s authority to operate designed for cornering at the same speeds as
sure shown on the tire placard to turn the equipment. conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more
the low tire pressure warning light OFF.
This device complies with Part 15 of the than low-slung sports cars are designed to per-
If you have a flat tire, replace it with a
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at
spare tire as soon as possible. (See
Canada. all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As
“Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
section for changing a flat tire.) Operation is subject to the following two this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel conditions: (1) This device may not cause or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
is replaced, tire pressure will not be harmful interface, and (2) this device must person is significantly more likely to die than a
indicated and the low tire pressure accept any interference received, including person wearing a seat belt.
warning system will not function. Con- interference that may cause undesired op-
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as eration of the device. Be sure to read the driving safety precautions
possible for tire replacement and/or later in this section.
system resetting.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.

5-4 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
AVOIDING COLLISION AND significantly more likely to be injured or ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
ROLLOVER killed than a person properly wearing a hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
seat belt.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe DRIVING off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-
and prudent manner may result in loss of
ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for
control or an accident. WARNING leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey Never drive under the influence of alcohol hicle.
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
Remember that two-wheel drive models are less
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma- duces coordination, delays reaction time
capable than four-wheel drive models for rough
neuvers, because these driving practices could and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood road driving and extrication when stuck in deep
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with snow or mud, or the like.
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a of being involved in an accident injuring
collision with other vehicles or objects, or yourself and others. Additionally, if you Please observe the following precautions:
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury. WARNING
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, ● Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under you must choose not to drive under the influence avoid dangerous areas. Every person
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are who drives or rides in this vehicle
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al- should be seated with their seat belt
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt though the local laws vary on what is considered fastened. This will keep you and your
as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol passengers in position when driving
supplemental restraint system” section of this affects all people differently and most people over rough terrain.
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do underestimate the effects of alcohol. ● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-
so. stead drive either straight up or straight
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli- down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an tip over sideways much more easily
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
unbelted or improperly belted person is than they can forward or backward.

Starting and driving 5-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. ● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around ● Lower your speed when encountering
If you drive up them, you may stall. If when driving over rough terrain. Prop- strong crosswinds. With a higher center
you drive down them, you may not be erly secure all cargo so it will not be of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-
able to control your speed. If you drive thrown forward and cause injury to you fected by strong side winds. Slower
across them, you may roll over. or your passengers. speeds ensure better vehicle control.
● Do not shift gears while driving on ● To avoid raising the center of gravity ● Do not drive beyond the performance
downhill grades as this could cause excessively, do not exceed the rated capablity of the tires, even with 4WD
loss of control of the vehicle. capactiy of the roof rack/gear bin (if so engaged.
equipped) and evenly distribute the
● Stay alert when driving to the top of a ● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off maneuvers or sudden braking may
area as far forward and as low as pos-
or other hazard that could cause an cause loss of control.
sible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires
accident.
larger than specified in this manual. ● If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
● If your engine stalls or you cannot make This could cause your vehicle to roll maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
it to the top of a steep hill, never at- over. Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle
tempt to turn around. Your vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a
● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
could tip or roll over. Always back two-wheel drive vehicle. The vehicle is
steering wheel when driving off-road.
straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never not designed for cornering at the same
The steering wheel could move sud-
back down in N (Neutral) or with the speeds as conventional two-wheel
denly and injure your hands. Instead
clutch depressed (manual transmission drive vehicles. Failure to operate this
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
vehicles), using only the brake, as this vehicle correctly could result in loss of
the outside of the rim.
could cause loss of control. control and/or a rollover accident.
● Before operating the vehicle, ensure
● Heavy braking going down a hill could ● Always use tires of the same type, size,
that the driver and all passengers have
cause your brakes to overheat and fade, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,
their seat belts fastened.
resulting in loss of control and an acci- or radial), and tread pattern on all four
dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low ● Always drive with the floor mats in wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
gear to control your speed. Use the Hill place as the floor may become hot. wheels when driving on slippery roads
Descent Control feature (if so and drive carefully.
equipped).

5-6 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
IGNITION SWITCH

● Be sure to check the brakes immedi- 1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-
ately after driving in mud or water. See tion with the key in the ON position.
“Brake system” later in this section for 2. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
“Wet brakes”.
3. Remove the key from the ignition.
● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it If the selector lever is shifted to the P (Park)
rolls forward, backward or sideways, position after the key is turned to the OFF posi-
you could be injured. tion or when the key cannot be turned to the
● Whenever you drive off-road through LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the
sand, mud or water as deep as the key.
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance 1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)
may be required. See “Periodic mainte- position.
nance” in the “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide.” WSD0041 2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION position.
3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be
turned to the LOCK position and removed until 4. Remove the key.
the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot
position.
moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other
When removing the key from the ignition, make gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF
sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park) position or if the key is removed from the switch.
position.
The shift selector lever can be moved if the
If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) ignition switch is in the ON position and the
position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK foot brake pedal is depressed.
position.
There is an OFF position between the
To remove the key from the ignition switch: LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.
Starting and driving 5-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
When the ignition is in the OFF position, This position activates electrical accessories 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
the steering wheel is not locked. such as the radio when the engine is not running.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it ON: Normal operating position (3) (which may have caused the interference)
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise separate from the registered NVIS key.
This position turns on the ignition system and the
from the straight up position. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
electrical accessories.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to ommends placing the registered NVIS key on a
START: (4) separate key ring to avoid interference from other
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key This position starts the engine. As soon as the devices.
and turn it gently while rotating the steer- engine has started, release the key. It automati-
ing wheel slightly right and left. cally returns to the ON position.
If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi- NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or SYSTEM (NVIS)
right while turning the key to unlock the
key cylinder. The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS)
will not allow the engine to start without the use of
WARNING the registered NVIS key.
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK If the engine fails to start using a registered NVIS
position while driving. The steering wheel key (for example, when interference is caused by
will lock. This may cause the driver to lose another NVIS key, an automated toll road device
control of the vehicle and could result in or automatic payment device on the key ring),
serious vehicle damage or personal injury. restart the engine using the following proce-
dures:
KEY POSITIONS
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
LOCK: Normal parking position (0) for approximately 5 seconds.
OFF: (Not used) (1) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
ACC: (Accessories) (2) position, and wait approximately 10 sec-
onds.
5-8 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

● Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. cranking the engine, release the accel-
clear. erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-
● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. ing the ignition key to START. Release the
ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as
The shift selector lever cannot be key when the engine starts. If the engine
frequently as possible, or at least whenever
moved out of P (Park) and into any of starts, but fails to run, repeat the above
you refuel.
the other gear positions if the ignition procedure.
● Check that all windows and lights are clean. key is turned to the OFF position or if
the key is removed from the ignition CAUTION
● Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper switch. Do not operate the starter for more than
inflation. The starter is designed not to operate if 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
the shift selector lever is in any of the not start, turn the key off and wait 10
● Lock all doors.
driving positions. seconds before cranking again, otherwise
● Position seat and adjust head restraints. the starter could be damaged.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
● Adjust inside and outside mirrors. accelerator pedal by turning the ignition 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
key to START. Release the key when the onds after starting. Do not race the engine
● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to while warming it up. Drive at moderate
do likewise.
run, repeat the above procedure. speed for a short distance first, especially in
● Check the operation of warning lights when cold weather.
the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See ● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting, In cold weather, keep the engine running for
“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap- a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it
minders” in the “Instruments and controls”
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a
section of this manual.
and then crank the engine. Release the short period of time may make the vehicle
key and the accelerator pedal when the more difficult to start.
engine starts.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After
Starting and driving 5-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
DRIVING THE VEHICLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The recommended operating procedures for this


transmission are shown on the following pages.
WARNING Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- Starting the vehicle
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
Always depress the brake pedal until
foot brake pedal before attempting to move
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
the shift selector lever out of the P (Park)
could cause you to lose control and
position.
have an accident.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
move the shift selector lever into a driving
caution when shifting into a forward or
gear.
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up. 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start LSD0151

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) the vehicle in motion. To move the selector lever:
while the vehicle is moving. This could The automatic transmission is designed so : Push the button while depressing the
cause an accident. the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed brake pedal
before shifting from P (Park) to any drive
CAUTION position while the ignition switch is in the : Push the button to shift
ON position.
● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill : Shift without depressing brake pedal
grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- The shift selector lever cannot be moved
pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot out of P (Park) and into any of the other Shifting
brake should be used for this purpose. gear positions if the ignition key is turned After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the pedal and move the shift selector lever out of the
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
key is removed. P (Park) position.
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is
electronically controlled to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.
5-10 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
R (Reverse): 4H:
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector 62 MPH (100 km/h)
CAUTION
lever is in any position while the engine is 4LO:
not running. Failure to do so could cause Use this position only when the vehicle is
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll completely stopped. 31 MPH (50 km/h)
away and result in serious personal injury Use this position to back up. Make sure the 2 (Second gear):
or property damage. vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-
If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for ing on downhill grades.
any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or must be depressed to move the selector
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds
any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned
position to R (Reverse). over the following and do not exceed the follow-
to the LOCK position and be removed from the
ignition switch. Move the selector lever to the P N (Neutral): ing speeds in the 2 position.
(Park) position, then the key can be turned to Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The 2WD and AUTO:
LOCK. engine can be started in this position. You may 71 MPH (115 km/h)
P (Park): shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving. 4H:
Use this selector position when the vehicle is
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure D (Drive): 62 MPH (100 km/h)
the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake Use this position for all normal forward driving. 4LO:
pedal must be depressed to move the se- 3 (Third gear):
lector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive 31 MPH (50 km/h)
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. Use this position for driving up and down long slopes 1 (Low gear):
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake where engine braking would be advantageous.
first, then move the shift selector lever into the P Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
Do not downshift into the 3 position at speeds
(Park) position. or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,
over the following and do not exceed the follow-
ing speeds in the 3 position. or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.
2WD and AUTO:
62 MPH (100 km/h)
Starting and driving 5-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds 1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
over the following and do not exceed the follow- and remove the key
ing speeds in the 1 position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
2WD and AUTO:
3. Remove the shift lock release cover as
43 MPH (70 km/h) shown.
4H: 4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock
43 MPH (70 km/h) release slot and push down.
4LO: 5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-
tral) position while holding down the shift
31 MPH (50 km/h) lock release.
6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the
LSD0141 steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be
Shift lock release moved to the desired location.
If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of
If the battery is discharged, the shift selector lever
P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-
may not be moved from the P (Park) position even
matic transmission system as soon as possible.
with the brake pedal depressed.
To move the shift selector lever, release the shift WARNING
lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N
If the selector lever cannot be moved from
(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be the P (Park) position while the engine is
locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the running and the brake pedal is depressed,
ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-
if the battery is discharged. ing stop lights could cause an accident
To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- injuring yourself and others.
lowing procedure:

5-12 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
Accelerator downshift OFF: For driving up and down long
— in D position — slopes where engine braking is nec-
essary push the Overdrive switch
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis- once. The O/D OFF indicator light
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the in the instrument panel comes on at
vehicle speed. this time.
When cruising at a low speed or climbing a
gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift
shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of
Overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the
Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. The
O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel
comes on at this time.
LSD0142
When driving conditions change, depress the
Overdrive switch Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.
Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis- Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-
sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON. tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.
This reduces fuel economy.
ON: With the engine running and the
shift selector lever in the D (Drive)
position, the transmission upshifts
into Overdrive as vehicle speed
increases.
Overdrive does not engage until the engine
has reached operating temperature.

Starting and driving 5-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL

WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the gear shift in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident. LSD0143 LSD0075
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake. 1. ACCEL/RES switch
To release: 2. COAST/SET switch
3. ON/OFF switch
1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 4. CANCEL switch
2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
position.
CONTROL
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it
will release. ● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light in the instrument panel then blinks to
light goes out. warn the driver.
● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control main switch off and have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

5-14 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
● The SET indicator light may blink when the To turn on the cruise control, push the main ● you depress the brake pedal while pushing
cruise control main switch is turned ON switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru- the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.
while pushing the ACCEL/RES, ment panel comes on. The preset speed is deleted from memory.
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to ● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
on the steering wheel). To properly set the
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch (13 km/h) below the set speed.
cruise control system, use the following pro-
and release it. The SET indicator light in the
cedures. instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the ● you move the shift selector lever to N (Neu-
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set tral).
WARNING speed. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
Do not use the cruise control when driving ● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- of the following three methods.
under the following conditions: celerator pedal. When you release the ● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
● When it is not possible to keep the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
vehicle at a set speed. set speed. release the COAST/SET switch.
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in ● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
speed. when going up or down steep hills. If this
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
happens, drive without the cruise control.
● On winding or hilly roads. sire, release the switch.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). ● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
following three methods.
● In very windy areas. Each time you do this, the set speed in-
● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle light in the instrument panel goes out.
control and result in an accident. To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light of the following three methods.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS goes out.
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be- ● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE hicle attains the desired speed, push the
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without indicator light and SET indicator light in the COAST/SET switch and release it.
instrument panel go out.
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. ● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
The cruise control is automatically canceled and lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if: the desired speed.
Starting and driving 5-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch. ● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
CAUTION
Each time you do this, the set speed de- cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), position.
follow these recommendations to obtain
To resume the preset speed, push and re- maximum engine performance and en- ● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re- sure the future reliability and economy of Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
turns to the last set cruising speed when the your new vehicle. Failure to follow these ● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). recommendations may result in short- Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
ened engine life and reduced engine hicles.
performance.
● Use a proper gear range which suits road
● Avoid driving for long periods at constant conditions. On level roads, shift into high
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the gear as soon as possible.
engine over 4,000 rpm.
● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
● Keep your engine tuned up.
● Avoid quick starts.
● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
● Avoid hard braking as much as possible. nance schedule.
● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles ● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
could be damaged. and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
● Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.

5-16 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD)

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more ● If the warning light is still on after the
CAUTION
economical to use the air conditioner and above operation, have your vehicle
leave the windows closed to reduce drag. ● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
position on dry hard surface roads. Driv- possible.
● Use 4H or 4L position only when ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO
necessary. Four-wheel drive operation low- may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear ● The transfer case may be damaged if
ers fuel economy. and increased fuel consumption. you continue driving with the warning
light blinking rapidly.
If the 4WD warning light turns on when
you are driving on dry hard surface All mode 4WD system (if so
roads:
equipped)
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD. The all mode 4WD system provides 4 positions
(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select
– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD the desired drive mode according to the driving
vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift conditions.
the transmission selector to the N
position with the brake pedal de- 2WD or 4WD shift procedure:
pressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position for part time 4WD
vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
the transmission selector to the N
position with the brake pedal de-
pressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.

Starting and driving 5-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
4WD Shift Indicator Light
Wheels Driven Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure
Switch Position 4WD shift Transfer 4LO position
Move the 4WD switch.
Rear wheels or 4 2WD <—> AUTO <—> 4H
For driving on paved or slippery roads
wheels 4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift
AUTO position engaged.
For driving on dry, paved roads IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE TRANS-
Rear wheels (Economy drive) or state dynamometer MISSION SELECTOR TO THE (N) POSITION IN
I/M testing THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATION
2WD
WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.
For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-
4 wheels
covered roads
4H Neutral Neutral disengages the automatic 1. Stop the vehicle.
transmission mechanical parking lock, 2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N)
which will allow the vehicle to roll. Do position.
*1
not leave the transfer shift position in 3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO
May blink
Neutral.*2 or 4H with the brake pedal depressed.
YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD
4LO SHIFT SWITCH BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO
4 wheels For use when maximum power and TO 4H) UNLESS YOU FIRST STOP THE VEHICLE
traction is required (for example: on DEPRESS THE BRAKE AND SHIFT THE TRANS-
Illuminated steep grades or rocky, sandy, muddy MISSION SELECTOR LEVER TO THE NEUTRAL
roads) (N) POSITION, THEN DEPRESS AND TURN THE
4WD SHIFT SWITCH TO 4LO OR 4H. *3

*1: The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the transmission selector has been shifted
to the N position. If the indicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while.
Then the light will turn on or off.
• Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears may grind, damaging the drive system.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator
lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO.

5-18 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to ● The 4H position provides greater trac- ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry
driving conditions. There are four types of drive cause increased fuel consumption and hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause
modes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. higher oil temperatures, and could unnecessary noise and tire wear.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the damage drivetrain components. NISSAN recommends driving in the
transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to Speeds over 62.5 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H 2WD or AUTO position under these
is not recommended. conditions.
move between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H and
4LO. ● The 4LO position provides maximum ● The 4WD transfer case may not be
traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed ex- shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-
You must depress the switch to select 4LO, cessively, as the maximum speed is ap- bient temperatures and the transfer
and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the proximately 31 MPH (50 km/h). 4LO position indicator light may blink
automatic transmission selector lever in even when the 4WD shift switch is
the N position when changing into or out of ● When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shifted. After driving for a while you can
4LO. shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H
change the 4WD transfer case between
position. Do not move the 4WD shift
4H and 4LO.
switch when making a turn or reversing.
WARNING
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be- When driving on rough roads,
When parking, apply the parking brake
tween 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while driving ● Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or
before stopping the engine and make sure
on steep downhill grades. Use the en- 4LO.
that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and
gine brake and low automatic transmis-
the ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise, ● Drive carefully according to the road surface
sion gears (D1 or D2) for engine
the vehicle could unexpectedly move even conditions.
braking.
if the automatic transmission is in the P
position. ● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch When the vehicle is stuck,
(between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with the ● Place stones or wooden blocks under the
CAUTION rear wheels spinning. tires to free the vehicle.
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- ● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

Starting and driving 5-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat
forward and backward movement to in-
crease the movement.
● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire chains
may be effective.

CAUTION
● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires
will sink deep into the mud, making it
difficult to free the vehicle.
● Avoid shifting gears with the engine
running at high speeds as this may
cause malfunction.
Part time 4WD system (if so
equipped)
The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions
(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the
desired drive mode according to the driving con-
ditions.
2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

5-20 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
4WD Shift Indicator Light
Wheels Driven Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure
Switch Position 4WD shift Transfer 4LO position
Move the 4WD switch.
For driving on dry, paved roads 2WD <—> 4H
Rear wheels (Economy drive) or state dynamometer 4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift
2WD I/M testing position engaged.
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO SHIFT THE TRANS-
For driving on rocky, sandy or snow- MISSION SELECTOR LEVER TO THE N POSITION
4 wheels IN THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERA-
covered roads
4H TION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.
Neutral Neutral disengages the automatic trans- 1. Stop the vehicle.
mission mechanical parking lock, which 2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N) posi-
*1 will allow the vehicle to roll. Do not leave tion with the brake pedal depressed.
May blink the transfer shift position in Neutral.*2 3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO
or 4H with the brake pedal depressed.
THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BE-
4LO 4 wheels For use when maximum power and trac- TWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS
tion is required (for example: on steep YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DE-
Illuminated
grades or rocky, sandy, muddy roads) PRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE
TRANSMISSION SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

*1: Before moving the transmission selector shift lever from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer
gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.
- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.
1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch 9OFF9.
2. Start the engine.
- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the transmission selector lever to Neutral position.
4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode.
- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the transmission selector lever from Neutral position.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position
indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO.

Starting and driving 5-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to ● The 4LO indicator light must stop blink- ● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-
select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the ing and remain illuminated or turn off tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on
driving conditions. There are three types of drive before shifting the transmission into steep downhill grades. Use the engine
modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. gear. If the transmission selector is brake and low automatic transmission
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the shifted from the (N) position to any gears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.
transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to other gear when the 4LO indicator light
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
is blinking, the vehicle may move
move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. (between 2WD and 4H) with the rear
unexpectedly.
wheels spinning.
To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle
MUST be stationary, shift the transmission CAUTION ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
selector to Neutral (N), and depress the in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause
brake pedal. The switch must be depressed
tween 4LO and 4H while driving. unnecessary noise and tire wear.
and turned when changing into or out of
4LO. ● The 4H position provides greater trac- NISSAN recommends driving in the
tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will 2WD position under these conditions.
WARNING cause increased fuel consumption and ● The 4WD transfer case may not be
higher oil temperatures, and could shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-
damage drivetrain components. bient temperatures and the transfer
● When parking, apply the parking brake Speeds over 62.5 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H 4LO position indicator light may blink
before stopping the engine and make is not recommended. even when the 4WD shift switch is
sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is ● The 4LO position provides maximum shifted. After driving for a while you can
on and the ATP warning light goes off. traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed ex- change the 4WD transfer case between
Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect- cessively, as the maximum speed is ap- 4H and 4LO.
edly move even if the automatic trans- proximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).
mission is in the P position. When driving on rough roads,
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD ● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Do not move the 4WD shift switch when ● Drive carefully according to the road surface
making a turn or reversing. conditions.

5-22 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
When the vehicle is stuck,
● Place stones or wooden blocks under the
tires to free the vehicle.
● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat
forward and backward movement to in-
crease the movement.
● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire chains
may be effective.

CAUTION
● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires LSD0144 LSD0145
will sink deep into the mud, making it
difficult to free the vehicle. Type A Type B
● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the only), 4H or 4LO, you may feel a jolt.
● Avoid shifting gears with the engine 2WD, AUTO (Type A only), 4H or 4LO po- This is not abnormal.
running at high speeds as this may
sition, depending on driving conditions.
cause malfunction. ● When the vehicle is stopped after mak-
● With the switch set to the AUTO position ing a turn, you may feel a slight jolt
4WD shift switch operations (Type A only), distribution of torque to the after the selector lever is shifted to N or
front and rear wheels changes automatically, P. This occurs because the transfer
depending on road conditions encountered clutch is released and not because of a
[ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) → 50 : 50 (4WD)]. malfunction.
This results in improved driving stability.
● If the 4WD shift switch is operated
while making a turn, accelerating or
decelerating or if the key switch is
turned off while in the AUTO (Type A

Starting and driving 5-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
area around the vehicle is safe, and
CAUTION
drive the vehicle straight, accelerate or
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD decelerate or move the vehicle in re-
shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H verse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.
position. Do not move the 4WD shift
switch when making a turn or reversing. ● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the
4WD indicator light goes out.
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while
driving on steep downhill grades. Use
CAUTION
the engine brake and low automatic
transmission gears (D1 or D2) for en- ● When the 4WD shift switch is turned to
gine braking. the AUTO position at low ambient tem-
peratures, the 4WD shift indicator light
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
may show 4H. If this happens, all four
with the rear wheels spinning.
wheels are driven as torque distribution
● Before placing the 4WD shift switch in LSD0147 is in the 4H position. Be careful as the
the 4H position from 2WD or AUTO, The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the vehicle may become difficult to turn.
ensure the vehicle speed is less than odometer display. When the vehicle is driven, the 4WD
62.5 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so shift indicator light should change to
can damage the 4WD system. The light should turn off within 1 second after AUTO.
turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- ● If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-
tween 4LO and 4H while driving. While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi- tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD
cator light will illuminate the position selected by shift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4H
● Engine idling speed is high while warm-
the 4WD shift switch. position at low ambient temperatures,
ing up the engine. Be especially careful
the 2WD mode may be being engaged
when starting or driving on slippery sur- ● The 4WD shift indicator light may blink due to malfunctioning drive system. If
faces with the 4WD shift switch set in while shifting from one drive mode to the indicator does not return to normal
AUTO. the other. When the shifting is com- and the 4WD warning light comes on,
pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light have the system checked by the nearest
4WD shift indicator light will come on. For all mode 4WD ve- NISSAN dealer.
hicles, if the indicator light does not
come on immediately, make sure the
5-24 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
4WD warning light For all mode 4WD vehicles, high-temperature ● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO
transfer case oil makes the warning light blink position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-
rapidly (about twice per second). If the warning ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO
light blinks rapidly during operation, stop the ve- may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear
Comes on or blinks hicle in a safe place immediately. Then if the light and increased fuel consumption.
Warning light goes off after a while, you can continue driving.
when:
If the 4WD warning light turns on when
A large difference between the diameters of front you are driving on dry hard surface roads:
There is a malfunc- and rear wheels will make the warning light blink
– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the
Comes on tion in the 4–wheel slowly (about once per two seconds). Change 4WD shift switch to 2WD.
drive system the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive
fast. – in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD
The transfer case vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
oil temperature is the transmission selector to the N
Blinks rapidly abnormally high (all CAUTION
position and shift the 4WD shift
mode 4WD ve- ● If the warning light comes on or blinks switch to 2WD.
hicles) slowly during operation or rapidly after
stopping the vehicle for a while, have – in the 4LO position for part time 4WD
The difference in vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
Blinks slowly wheel rotation is the transmission selector to the N
large
dealer as soon as possible.
position with the brake pedal de-
● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not pressed and shift the 4WD shift
The 4WD warning light is located in the meter. recommended when the 4WD warning switch to 2WD.
light turns on.
The 4WD warning light comes on when the key ● If the warning light is still on after the
switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the ● When the warning light comes on, the above operation, have your vehicle
engine is started. 2WD mode may be engaged even if the checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be possible.
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system
especially careful when driving. If corre-
when the key switch is ON, the warning light will ● The transfer case may be damaged if
sponding parts are malfunctioning, the
either remain illuminated or blink. you continue driving with the warning
4WD mode will not be engaged even if
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD the 4WD shift switch is shifted. light blinking rapidly.
shift indicator light goes out.
Starting and driving 5-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s


A

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the


vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s
B

Turn the wheels away from the curb and


move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB: s
C

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road


so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
WSD0050
ter of the road if it moves.
WARNING ● Never leave the engine running while 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
the vehicle is unattended. and remove the key.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass, ● Do not leave children unattended inside
waste paper or rags. They may ignite the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
and cause a fire. tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
● Safe parking procedures require that ous accidents.
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and re- 2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift position.
lever has been pushed as far forward as
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
it can go and cannot be moved without
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
depressing the foot brake pedal.
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
5-26 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic The brake system has two separate hydraulic
WARNING
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels. ● While driving on a slippery surface, be
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you careful when braking, accelerating or
will still have control of the vehicle. However, BRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
much greater steering effort is needed, especially erating could cause the wheels to skid
in sharp turns and at low speeds. Vacuum assisted brakes and result in an accident.
WARNING The brake booster aids braking by using engine ● If the engine is not running or is turned
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the off while driving, the power assist for
If the engine is not running or is turned off vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, the brakes will not work. Braking will be
while driving, the power assist for the greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be harder.
steering will not work. Steering will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
much harder to operate. tance will be longer. Wet brakes
Using the brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the may pull to one side during braking.
brakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
downshift to a lower gear before going down a to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may speeds until the brakes function correctly.
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control. Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.
Starting and driving 5-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
This procedure is described in the vehicle service ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road. If the light comes on during the self-test or while
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN Thus, difficult steering and swerving of the ve- driving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for
dealer. hicle due to locked wheels is minimized. The repair.
system detects the wheel rotation rate and elec-
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) tronically controls the pressure applied to each WARNING
The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes so brake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accom- ● The anti-lock brake system is a sophis-
the wheels do not lock when braking abruptly or panied by noise usually occurs while the ABS ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-
when braking on slippery surfaces. The system system is operating. Such vibration and noise cidents resulting from careless or dan-
detects the rotation speed at each wheel and encountered during abrupt braking is not a prob- gerous driving techniques. It can help
varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each lem, but indicates that the system is functioning maintain vehicle control during braking
wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing properly. However, the pulsation may indicate on slippery surfaces, but remember that
wheel lockup, the system helps the driver main- that road conditions are hazardous and extra care the stopping distance on slippery sur-
tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv- is required while driving. faces will be longer than on normal
ing and spinning on slippery surfaces. surfaces even with the anti-lock brake
Self-test feature system. Stopping distances may also
Using the system be longer on rough, gravel or snow cov-
The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. sensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a ered roads, or if you are using tire
computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic chains. Tire type and condition may also
WARNING affect braking effectiveness. Always
feature that tests the system each time you start
maintain a safe distance from the ve-
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in
hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the re-
may result in increased stopping forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, sponsibility for safety of self and others
distances. you may hear a ‘‘clunk’’ noise and/or feel a pulsa- rests in the hands of the driver.
tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not
Normal operation an indication of any malfunction. If the computer ● Tire type and condition of tires may also
senses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lock affect braking effectiveness.
The anti-lock brake system does not operate at
speeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (The brake system off and turns on the ABS brake ● When replacing tires, install the speci-
speeds vary according to road conditions.) warning light on the instrument panel. The brake fied size of tires on all four wheels.
system then operates normally, but without anti-
When driving, the anti-lock brake system con- lock assistance.
trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-
5-28 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)

● When installing a spare tire, make sure When accelerating or driving on slippery sur- ● If you interrupt the reset procedure by turn-
it is the proper size and type as speci- faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle ing the ignition off, you will need to restart
fied on the tire placard. For tire placard Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect the reset procedure.
location information, refer to “Tire plac- these movements and control the braking and
If after driving the vehicle for more than 10 min-
ard” in the “Technical and consumer engine output to help improve vehicle stability.
utes and the SLIP and lights remain illumi-
information” section of this manual. ● When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC) nated in the instrument panel, have the vehicle
● Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the system is operating, the SLIP indicator in the dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- instrument panel blinks. dealer.
tion of this manual.
● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi- If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic
tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your control system off using the VDC OFF switch,
speed and driving to these conditions. See most VDC functions will be turned off. The VDC
“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamic system will still try to transfer power from a slip-
control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In- ping drive wheel to one with more traction when
struments and controls” section. the VDC system switch is OFF. The Slip indicator
will flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS will
If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac-
still operate with the VDC system off.
tion control system may be disabled and the
SLIP and indicator lights will not turn off When the VDC system is operating, you may feel
after 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or
to the ON position. Perform the following proce- vibration from under the hood. This is normal and
dure to reset the system: indicates that the VDC system is working prop-
erly.
● Start the engine and set the steering wheel
in the straight forward position. The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
● Drive the vehicle at speeds above 10 mph
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
(15 km/h) for at least 10 minutes.
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
● The VDC OFF indicator light should go off may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
indicating the traction control system is op- the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
erational. indication of a malfunction.
Starting and driving 5-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)

WARNING ● When driving on extremely inclined sur- WARNING


faces such as higher banked corners,
● The vehicle dynamic control system is the vehicle dynamic control system may ● Never rely solely on the hill descent
designed to help improve driving stabil- not operate properly and the VDC OFF control system to control vehicle speed
ity but does not prevent accidents due indicator light may come on. Do not when driving on steep down hill grades.
to abrupt steering operation at high drive on these types of roads. Always drive carefully and attentively
speeds or by careless or dangerous when using the hill descent control sys-
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle ● When driving on an unstable surface tem and decelerate the vehicle speed
speed and be especially careful when such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or by depressing the brake pedal if neces-
driving and cornering on slippery sur- ramp, the vehicle dynamic control off sary. Be especially careful when driving
faces and always drive carefully. indicator light may illuminate. This is on frozen, muddy or an extremely steep
not a malfunction. Restart the engine downhill roads. Failure to control ve-
● If brake related parts such as brake after driving onto a stable surface hicle speed may result in a loss of con-
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-
● If wheels or tires other than the recom- trol of the vehicle and possible serious
dard equipment or are extremely dete-
mended ones are used, the vehicle dy- injury or death.
riorated, the vehicle dynamic control
system may not operate properly and namic control system may not operate ● The hill descent control may not control
the vehicle dynamic control off indica- properly and the vehicle dynamic con- the vehicle speed on a hill under all load
tor light may come on. trol off indicator light may come on. or road conditions. Always be prepared
● The vehicle dynamic control system is to depress the brake pedal to control
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
not a substitute for winter tires or tire vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
chains on a snow covered road. sult in a collision or serious personal
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars
injury.
and bushings are not NISSAN approved
for your vehicle or are extremely dete- The hill descent control system helps maintain
riorated the vehicle dynamic control vehicle speed when driving under 15-21 mph
system may not operate properly. This (25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. HDC
could adversely affect vehicle handling is useful when engine braking alone in 4H or 4L
performance, and the VDC OFF indica-
cannot control vehicle speed. HDC applies the
tor light may come on.
vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed allowing

5-30 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
HILL START ASSIST (HSA) SYSTEM
(if so equipped)

the driver to concentrate on steering while reduc- The hill start assist system automatically keeps
WARNING
ing the burden of brake and accelerator opera- the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle
tion. ● Never rely solely on the hill start assist from rolling backwards in the time it takes the
system to prevent the vehicle from mov- driver to release the brake pedal and apply the
● When additional braking is required on ing backward on a hill. Always drive accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.
steep downhill roads activate the HDC sys- carefully and attentively. Depress the
tem by pushing the switch ON, see “Hill brake pedal when the vehicle is Hill start assist will operate automatically under
descent control (HDC) switch” in the “In- stopped on a steep hill. Be especially the following conditions:
struments and controls” section. careful when stopped on a hill on frozen ● The selector lever is shifted to a forward or
● Once the system is activated the indicator or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the reverse gear.
light will remain on in the instrument panel, vehicle from rolling backwards may re-
sult in a loss of control of the vehicle ● The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill
see “Hill descent control (HDC) system on
and possible serious injury or death. by applying the brake.
indicator light” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section. ● The hill start assist system is not de- The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2
signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed
on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when start assist will stop operating completely.
while the HDC system is on, the system will stop
operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Hill start assist will not operate when the selector
or brake pedal is released, the HDC system Failure to do so may cause the vehicle lever is shifted to N or P or on a flat and level road.
begins to function again if the HDC operating to roll backwards and may result in a
conditions are fulfilled. collision or serious personal injury.
For the best results, when descending steep ● The hill start assist may not prevent the
downhill grades, the HDC switch should be ON vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill
and the selector lever in 2 (Second gear) or 1 under all load or road conditions. Al-
(Low gear) for engine braking. ways be prepared to depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards. Failure to do so may result
in a collision or serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK For details, see ‘‘Changing engine coolant’’ in the for the tires on your vehicle and are installed
‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this according to the chain manufacturer’s sug-
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- manual. gestions. Use only SAE Class “S”
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key TIRE EQUIPMENT hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-
hole. 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
provide superior performance on dry pave- are designed to meet the minimum clear-
ANTI-FREEZE ances between the tire and the closest ve-
ment. However, the performance of these
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- tires will be substantially reduced in snowy hicle suspension or body component re-
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- quired to accommodate the use of a winter
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- traction device (tire chains or cables). The
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL minimum clearances are determined using
For details, see ‘‘Engine cooling system’’ in the
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please the factory equipped tire size. Other types
‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, may damage your vehicle. Use chain ten-
manual. sioners when recommended by the tire
size, speed rating and availability informa-
BATTERY tion. chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.
Loose end links of the tire chain must be
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded secured or removed to prevent the possibil-
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may tires may be used. However, some U.S. ity of whipping action damage to the fenders
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- states and Canadian provinces prohibit their or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked use. Check local, state and provincial laws your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-
regularly. For details, see ‘‘Battery’’ in the ‘‘Main- before installing studded tires. tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,
tenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this Skid and traction capabilities of studded your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle
manual. snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be handling and performance may be adversely
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. affected.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER Never install tire chains on spare tires. Do
3. Tire chains may be used.
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- not use tire chains on dry roads.
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. ing to location. Check the local laws before
installing tire chains. When installing tire
chains, make sure they are the proper size
5-32 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT ● Allow more stopping distance under WARNING
It is recommended that the following items be these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement. Do not use your heater with an un-
carried in the vehicle during winter: grounded electrical system or two-
● Allow greater following distances on pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove slippery roads. injured by an electrical shock if you use an
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). ungrounded connection.
blades.
These may appear on an otherwise
● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
jack to give it firm support. ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser- maneuvers.
voir tank.
● Do not use the cruise control on slip-
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE pery roads.
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
WARNING gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), clear of the exhaust pipe and from
very cold snow or ice can be slick and around your vehicle.
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on equipped)
wet ice until the road is salted or
An engine block heater to assist in extreme cold
sanded.
temperature starting is available through a
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau- NISSAN dealer.
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.

Starting and driving 5-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
MEMO

5-34 Starting and driving


6 In case of emergency

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10


Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Low tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
FIRST AID KIT FLAT TIRE

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING


SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres-
sure warning system. It monitors tire pressure of
all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure
monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If
equipped, the system also displays pressure of
all tires (except the spare tire) on the display
screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being
driven with low tire pressure (lower than 28 psi,
193 kPa), the low tire pressure warning system
LCE0104
will activate and warn you of it by the low tire
A first aid kit is located on the back door trim pressure warning light. This system will activate
panel. To remove the first aid kit: only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above
s
1 Squeeze the latch buttons. 20 MPH (32 km/h). For more details, refer to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”
s
2 Pull the two straps apart to unfasten. in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire
pressure information” in the “Display screen,
heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-
tion and “Low tire pressure warning system” in
the “Starting and driving” section.

6-2 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
WARNING CHANGING A FLAT TIRE ● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be- close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
● If the low tire pressure warning light sional road assistance.
flashes while driving, avoid sudden low.
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road Stopping the vehicle is replaced, tire pressure will not be
to a safe location and stop the vehicle 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and indicated and the low tire pressure
as soon as possible. Serious vehicle away from traffic. warning system will not function. Con-
damage could occur and may lead to an tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
accident and could result in serious 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. possible for tire replacement and/or
personal injury. Check the tire pressure system resetting.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure
brake. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
to the recommended COLD tire pres-
sure shown on the Tire and Loading 4. Turn off the engine.
Information label to turn the low tire
pressure warning light OFF. If you have 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as signal professional road assistance person-
soon as possible. nel that you need assistance.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
is replaced, tire pressure will not be and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
indicated and the low tire pressure and clear of the vehicle.
warning system will not function. Con-
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as WARNING
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting. ● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the automatic transmission
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol is shifted into P (Park).
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure ● Never change tires when the vehicle is
sensors. on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.

In case of emergency 6-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
WCE0044 LCE0105 LCE0106
Blocking wheels 1. Jack 4. Find the oval-shaped opening above the
2. Jack tools middle of the bumper. Pass the T-shaped
Place suitable blocks s 1 at both the front and end of the jack rod through the opening and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire Getting the spare tire and tools direct it toward the spare tire winch, located
s2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
1. Open the back door. directly above the spare tire.
jacked up.
2. Lift the handle on the floor and open the
CAUTION
WARNING storage area.
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle 3. Remove the jack and jack tools. designed to be inserted at an angle as
may move and result in personal injury. shown.

6-4 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
6. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into ● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap- use any other part of the vehicle for jack
ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in support.
the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod
counterclockwise to lower the spare tire. ● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
7. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer
chain, and carefully slide the tire from under ● Do not start or run the engine while
the rear of the vehicle. vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
CAUTION for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-
ing plate on the wheel and then lift the ● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
spare tire. vehicle while it is on the jack.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
Jacking up vehicle and removing the the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
damaged tire move.

WARNING Always refer to the illustration for the correct


placement and jack-up points for your specific
● Never get under the vehicle while it is vehicle model and jack type.
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
LCE0107 essary to work under the vehicle, sup- Carefully read the caution label attached to
port it with safety stands. the jack body and the following instruc-
5. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the tions.
square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form ● Use only the jack provided with your
a handle. vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
jack provided with your vehicle on other turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
only your vehicle during a tire change. until the tire is off the ground.

In case of emergency 6-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
WCE0097 LCE0087
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up The jack should be used on firm and 3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack
point as illustrated so the top of the jack level ground. as shown.
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-
and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the
rows on the side of the frame.
tire clears the ground.

6-6 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
tire. touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-
hicle completely.

WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
WCE0063 to become loose.
Installing the spare tire Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle
The spare tire is designed for emergency has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km)
use. See specific instructions under the (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon as
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this specified torque with a torque wrench.
manual. Wheel nut tightening torque:
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be- 98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
tween the wheel and hub.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten specification at all times. It is recom-
the wheel nuts finger tight. mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel specifications at each lubrication interval.
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
JUMP STARTING

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been To start your engine with a booster battery, the ● Whenever working on or near a battery,
parked for three hours or more or driven instructions and precautions below must be fol- always wear suitable eye protectors (for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km). lowed. example, goggles or industrial safety
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire spectacles) and remove rings, metal
and Loading Information label affixed to WARNING bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
the driver side center pillar. ● If done incorrectly, jump starting can over the battery when jump starting.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip- lead to a battery explosion, resulting in ● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
ment in the vehicle. severe injury or death. It could also battery. It could explode and cause se-
damage your vehicle. rious injury.
WARNING ● Explosive hydrogen gas is always ● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
present in the vicinity of the battery. cooling fan. It could come on at any
● Always make sure that the spare tire
Keep all sparks and flames away from time. Keep hands and other objects
and jacking equipment are properly se-
the battery. away from it.
cured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or ● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
sudden stop. contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
● The spare tire is designed for emer-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
gency use. See specific instructions un-
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
come into contact with anything, imme-
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
diately flush the contacted area with
section of this manual.
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.

6-8 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
CAUTION
● Always connect positive (1) to positive
(1) and negative (2) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.

WCE0054
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever gine of the vehicle being jump started.
WARNING
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
Always follow the instructions below. (Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off
Failure to do so could result in damage to
CAUTION
all unnecessary electrical systems (lights,
the charging system and cause personal heater, air conditioner, etc.). Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
injury. more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so not start right away, turn the key off and
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, equipped). Cover the battery with an old wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
position the two vehicles to bring their bat- cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
teries near each other. 7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il- nect the negative cable and then the positive
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. lustrated (s
A,s
B,s C,sD ). cable.

In case of emergency 6-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be


CAUTION WARNING
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated Automatic transmission models cannot ● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
with corrosive acid. be push-started or tow-started. Attempt- overheats. Doing so could cause engine
ing to do so may cause transmission damage or a vehicle fire.
damage.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is still
hot. When the radiator or coolant reser-
voir cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading and
the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine
coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you
feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc. take the following steps.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
6-10 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for 6. After the engine cools down, check the cool- When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool- with the engine running. Add coolant to the followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
open the hood further until no steam or Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
coolant can be seen. dealer. tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
4. Open the engine hood.
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
WARNING
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
If steam or water is coming from the en- the service operator carefully read the following
gine, stand clear to prevent getting precautions:
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
WARNING
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is ● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
running. The radiator hoses and radiator towed.
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, ● Never get under your vehicle after it has
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or been lifted by a tow truck.
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
gine. CAUTION
WARNING ● When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, powertrain are in working condition. If
jewelry or clothing to come into contact any unit is damaged, dollies must be
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the used.
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
fan can start at any time when the coolant ● Always attach safety chains before
temperature is high. towing.

In case of emergency 6-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
For information about towing your vehicle behind
CAUTION
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- ● Never tow automatic transmission
tion of this manual. models with the rear wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY (forward or backward), as this may
NISSAN cause serious and expensive damage to
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the front wheels
raised always use towing dollies under
the rear wheels.
● When towing automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or on towing dollies:
– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-
sition, and secure the steering wheel
in a straight-ahead position with a
rope or similar device. Never secure
the steering wheel by turning the ig-
nition key to the LOCK position. This
may damage the steering lock
mechanism.
ACE1037 If the speed or distance must necessarily be
Two-wheel drive models greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing
to prevent damage to the transmission.
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

6-12 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
WSD0097 LCE0103
Four-wheel drive models CAUTION
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be vehicle) ● Tow chains or cables must be attached
used when towing your vehicle or place the ve- only to the main structural members of
hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated. WARNING the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so
equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body
CAUTION ● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. will be damaged.
● Never tow 4WD models with any of the ● Do not spin your tires at high speed. ● Use the towing hook (if so equipped)
wheels on the ground as this may cause This could cause them to explode and only to free a vehicle stuck in sand,
serious and expensive damage to the result in serious injury. Parts of your snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle
transfer case and transmission. vehicle could also overheat and be for a long distance using only the tow-
damaged. ing hook.

In case of emergency 6-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
● The towing hook is under tremendous ● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
force when used to free a stuck vehicle. to maintain the rocking motion.
Never pull the hook at an angle. ● Release the accelerator pedal before
● Always pull the cable straight out from shifting between R and D.
the front or rear of the vehicle. ● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
● Pulling devices should be routed so km/h).
they do not touch any part of the sus- 5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few
pension, steering, brake or cooling tries, contact a professional towing service
systems. to remove the vehicle.
● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
straps are not recommended for use in
vehicle towing or recovery.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System
(if so equipped).
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive).

6-14 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4


Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Most common factors contributing to vehicle
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate of
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-


CAUTION WAXING
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your household soap, strong chemical deter- helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
vehicle as soon as you can: gents, gasoline or solvents. recommended to remove built-up wax residue
● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage and to avoid a weathered appearance before
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
from acid rain. light or while the vehicle body is hot, as re-applying wax.
the surface may become water-spotted. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
● after driving on coastal roads.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough proper product.
● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop- cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get ● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
must be taken when removing ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
on the paint surface. caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- wax.
● when dust or mud builds up on the surface. stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged. ● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle cutting compounds or cleaners that may
inside a garage or in a covered area. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
damage the vehicle finish.
water.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a ● If the surface does not polish easily, use a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to “road tar” remover and wax again.
cover.
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
when putting on or removing the body drain holes in the lower edge of the door are finish or leave swirl marks.
cover. open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away REMOVING SPOTS
WASHING road salt. Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild avoid water spots. surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose staining. Special cleaning products are available
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
(never hot) water. store.
7-2 Appearance and care

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
CLEANING INTERIOR

UNDERBODY ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is Wash the wheels regularly, especially during win- cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in ter months in areas where road salt is used. If not surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and removed, road salt can discolor the wheels. mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry,
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- CHROME PARTS
the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fab-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non- ric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
be checked and, if necessary, retreated. abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. bleach the seat material.
GLASS Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is CAUTION
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft ● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
cloth will easily remove this film. lar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
CAUTION damaging to leather surfaces and
When cleaning the inside of the windows, should be removed promptly. Do not
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive use saddle soap, polishes, oils, clean-
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant ing fluids, solvents, detergents or
cleaners. They could damage the electri- ammonia-based cleaners as they may
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or damage the leather’s natural finish.
rear window defroster elements.
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover.

Appearance and care 7-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
FLOOR MATS SEAT BELTS
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex- The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
easier to clean the interior. No matter what Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
your vehicle and are properly positioned in in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
the footwell to prevent interference with tal restraint system” section of this manual.
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be- WARNING
come excessively worn.
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
WAI0006 weaken the seat belt webbing.
Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side
only)
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your ve-
hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a
grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat
by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the
floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in
the footwell.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.

7-4 Appearance and care

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
CORROSION PROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORS Temperature ● Never allow water or other liquids to


CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro- come in contact with electronic compo-
CORROSION nents inside the vehicle as this may
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
damage them.
● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt Air pollution
and debris in body panel sections, cavities, Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
and other areas. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- and deterioration of underbody components
● Damage to paint and other protective coat- ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel- such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or erates the disintegration of paint surfaces. brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
minor traffic accidents. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE periodically.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS FROM CORROSION
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF For additional protection against rust and corro-
● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
CORROSION vehicle clean. sult a NISSAN dealer.
Moisture ● Always check for minor damage to the paint
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve- and repair it as soon as possible.
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. ● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside open to avoid water accumulation.
the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to
● Check the underbody for accumulation of
avoid floor panel corrosion. sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
Relative humidity as soon as possible.

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high CAUTION


relative humidity, especially those areas where
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
bris from the passenger compartment
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
used. dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

Appearance and care 7-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
MEMO

7-6 Appearance and care


8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16


General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Parking brake and brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Checking parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Checking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Variable Voltage Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have Performing general maintenance checks requires During the normal day-to-day operation of the
minimum maintenance requirements with longer minimal mechanical skill and only a few general vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
service intervals to save you both time and automotive tools. formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
money. However, some day-to-day and regular These checks or inspections can be done by you, you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS- a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its dealer. NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
emission and engine performance. should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
Where to go for service repairs are required.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general If maintenance service is required or your vehicle When performing any checks or maintenance
maintenance, is performed. appears to malfunction, have the systems work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
tions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- information through technical bulletins, service MAINTENANCE ITEMS
nance chain. tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- Additional information on the following
Scheduled maintenance items with “*” is found later in this section.
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
For your convenience, both required and optional than after they have worked on it.
scheduled maintenance items are described and
Outside the vehicle
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
The maintenance items listed here should be
Guide.” You must refer to that guide to ensure service department performs the best job to meet
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
that necessary maintenance is performed on your specified.
in a reliable and economic way.
NISSAN at regular intervals.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
General maintenance and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
General maintenance includes those items which that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
should be checked during normal day-to-day op- latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these hood from opening when the primary latch is
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. released.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2005 Pathfinder (pat)


Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/31/05—cathy X
When driving in areas using road salt or other Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular the brake booster function. Be certain to keep the
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. basis. Check the windshield at least every six floor mat away from the pedal.
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail vehicle to one side when applied.
facility.
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
Parking brake* Check that the lever/pedal has
operating properly and installed securely. Also Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
the proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is
check headlight aim. wear if they do not wipe properly.
held securely on a fairly steep hill with only the
Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires, Inside the vehicle parking brake applied.
make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check
for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. The maintenance items listed here should be Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
checked on a regular basis, such as when per- adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-
7,500 miles (12,000 km). every position. Check that the head restraints
hicle, etc.
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- Additional information on the following equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
tion. Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
for damage